blob: 0246e7f3443e1218fa69e398b10a4fede540cc30 [file] [log] [blame]
Bram Moolenaar95a9dd12019-12-19 22:12:03 +01001*syntax.txt* For Vim version 8.2. Last change: 2019 Dec 19
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002
3
4 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar
5
6
7Syntax highlighting *syntax* *syntax-highlighting* *coloring*
8
9Syntax highlighting enables Vim to show parts of the text in another font or
10color. Those parts can be specific keywords or text matching a pattern. Vim
11doesn't parse the whole file (to keep it fast), so the highlighting has its
12limitations. Lexical highlighting might be a better name, but since everybody
13calls it syntax highlighting we'll stick with that.
14
15Vim supports syntax highlighting on all terminals. But since most ordinary
16terminals have very limited highlighting possibilities, it works best in the
17GUI version, gvim.
18
19In the User Manual:
20|usr_06.txt| introduces syntax highlighting.
21|usr_44.txt| introduces writing a syntax file.
22
231. Quick start |:syn-qstart|
242. Syntax files |:syn-files|
253. Syntax loading procedure |syntax-loading|
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100264. Converting to HTML |2html.vim|
275. Syntax file remarks |:syn-file-remarks|
286. Defining a syntax |:syn-define|
297. :syntax arguments |:syn-arguments|
308. Syntax patterns |:syn-pattern|
319. Syntax clusters |:syn-cluster|
Bram Moolenaarc8c88492018-12-27 23:59:26 +01003210. Including syntax files |:syn-include|
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +01003311. Synchronizing |:syn-sync|
3412. Listing syntax items |:syntax|
3513. Highlight command |:highlight|
3614. Linking groups |:highlight-link|
3715. Cleaning up |:syn-clear|
3816. Highlighting tags |tag-highlight|
3917. Window-local syntax |:ownsyntax|
4018. Color xterms |xterm-color|
4119. When syntax is slow |:syntime|
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000042
43{Vi does not have any of these commands}
44
45Syntax highlighting is not available when the |+syntax| feature has been
46disabled at compile time.
47
48==============================================================================
491. Quick start *:syn-qstart*
50
51 *:syn-enable* *:syntax-enable*
52This command switches on syntax highlighting: >
53
54 :syntax enable
55
56What this command actually does is to execute the command >
57 :source $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim
58
59If the VIM environment variable is not set, Vim will try to find
60the path in another way (see |$VIMRUNTIME|). Usually this works just
61fine. If it doesn't, try setting the VIM environment variable to the
62directory where the Vim stuff is located. For example, if your syntax files
Bram Moolenaar8024f932020-01-14 19:29:13 +010063are in the "/usr/vim/vim82/syntax" directory, set $VIMRUNTIME to
64"/usr/vim/vim82". You must do this in the shell, before starting Vim.
Bram Moolenaar01164a62017-11-02 22:58:42 +010065This command also sources the |menu.vim| script when the GUI is running or
66will start soon. See |'go-M'| about avoiding that.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000067
68 *:syn-on* *:syntax-on*
Bram Moolenaar01164a62017-11-02 22:58:42 +010069The `:syntax enable` command will keep your current color settings. This
70allows using `:highlight` commands to set your preferred colors before or
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000071after using this command. If you want Vim to overrule your settings with the
72defaults, use: >
73 :syntax on
74<
75 *:hi-normal* *:highlight-normal*
76If you are running in the GUI, you can get white text on a black background
77with: >
78 :highlight Normal guibg=Black guifg=White
79For a color terminal see |:hi-normal-cterm|.
80For setting up your own colors syntax highlighting see |syncolor|.
81
Bram Moolenaar5666fcd2019-12-26 14:35:26 +010082NOTE: The syntax files on MS-Windows have lines that end in <CR><NL>.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000083The files for Unix end in <NL>. This means you should use the right type of
Bram Moolenaar5666fcd2019-12-26 14:35:26 +010084file for your system. Although on MS-Windows the right format is
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000085automatically selected if the 'fileformats' option is not empty.
86
87NOTE: When using reverse video ("gvim -fg white -bg black"), the default value
88of 'background' will not be set until the GUI window is opened, which is after
Bram Moolenaar910f66f2006-04-05 20:41:53 +000089reading the |gvimrc|. This will cause the wrong default highlighting to be
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000090used. To set the default value of 'background' before switching on
Bram Moolenaar910f66f2006-04-05 20:41:53 +000091highlighting, include the ":gui" command in the |gvimrc|: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000092
93 :gui " open window and set default for 'background'
94 :syntax on " start highlighting, use 'background' to set colors
95
Bram Moolenaar910f66f2006-04-05 20:41:53 +000096NOTE: Using ":gui" in the |gvimrc| means that "gvim -f" won't start in the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000097foreground! Use ":gui -f" then.
98
Bram Moolenaar09092152010-08-08 16:38:42 +020099 *g:syntax_on*
100You can toggle the syntax on/off with this command: >
101 :if exists("g:syntax_on") | syntax off | else | syntax enable | endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000102
103To put this into a mapping, you can use: >
Bram Moolenaar09092152010-08-08 16:38:42 +0200104 :map <F7> :if exists("g:syntax_on") <Bar>
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000105 \ syntax off <Bar>
106 \ else <Bar>
107 \ syntax enable <Bar>
108 \ endif <CR>
109[using the |<>| notation, type this literally]
110
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000111Details:
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000112The ":syntax" commands are implemented by sourcing a file. To see exactly how
113this works, look in the file:
114 command file ~
115 :syntax enable $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim
116 :syntax on $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim
117 :syntax manual $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/manual.vim
118 :syntax off $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/nosyntax.vim
119Also see |syntax-loading|.
120
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100121NOTE: If displaying long lines is slow and switching off syntax highlighting
122makes it fast, consider setting the 'synmaxcol' option to a lower value.
123
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000124==============================================================================
1252. Syntax files *:syn-files*
126
127The syntax and highlighting commands for one language are normally stored in
128a syntax file. The name convention is: "{name}.vim". Where {name} is the
129name of the language, or an abbreviation (to fit the name in 8.3 characters,
130a requirement in case the file is used on a DOS filesystem).
131Examples:
132 c.vim perl.vim java.vim html.vim
133 cpp.vim sh.vim csh.vim
134
135The syntax file can contain any Ex commands, just like a vimrc file. But
136the idea is that only commands for a specific language are included. When a
137language is a superset of another language, it may include the other one,
138for example, the cpp.vim file could include the c.vim file: >
139 :so $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/c.vim
140
141The .vim files are normally loaded with an autocommand. For example: >
142 :au Syntax c runtime! syntax/c.vim
143 :au Syntax cpp runtime! syntax/cpp.vim
144These commands are normally in the file $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/synload.vim.
145
146
147MAKING YOUR OWN SYNTAX FILES *mysyntaxfile*
148
149When you create your own syntax files, and you want to have Vim use these
150automatically with ":syntax enable", do this:
151
1521. Create your user runtime directory. You would normally use the first item
153 of the 'runtimepath' option. Example for Unix: >
154 mkdir ~/.vim
155
1562. Create a directory in there called "syntax". For Unix: >
157 mkdir ~/.vim/syntax
158
1593. Write the Vim syntax file. Or download one from the internet. Then write
160 it in your syntax directory. For example, for the "mine" syntax: >
161 :w ~/.vim/syntax/mine.vim
162
163Now you can start using your syntax file manually: >
164 :set syntax=mine
165You don't have to exit Vim to use this.
166
167If you also want Vim to detect the type of file, see |new-filetype|.
168
169If you are setting up a system with many users and you don't want each user
170to add the same syntax file, you can use another directory from 'runtimepath'.
171
172
173ADDING TO AN EXISTING SYNTAX FILE *mysyntaxfile-add*
174
175If you are mostly satisfied with an existing syntax file, but would like to
176add a few items or change the highlighting, follow these steps:
177
1781. Create your user directory from 'runtimepath', see above.
179
1802. Create a directory in there called "after/syntax". For Unix: >
181 mkdir ~/.vim/after
182 mkdir ~/.vim/after/syntax
183
1843. Write a Vim script that contains the commands you want to use. For
185 example, to change the colors for the C syntax: >
186 highlight cComment ctermfg=Green guifg=Green
187
1884. Write that file in the "after/syntax" directory. Use the name of the
189 syntax, with ".vim" added. For our C syntax: >
190 :w ~/.vim/after/syntax/c.vim
191
192That's it. The next time you edit a C file the Comment color will be
193different. You don't even have to restart Vim.
194
Bram Moolenaar5313dcb2005-02-22 08:56:13 +0000195If you have multiple files, you can use the filetype as the directory name.
196All the "*.vim" files in this directory will be used, for example:
197 ~/.vim/after/syntax/c/one.vim
198 ~/.vim/after/syntax/c/two.vim
199
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000200
201REPLACING AN EXISTING SYNTAX FILE *mysyntaxfile-replace*
202
203If you don't like a distributed syntax file, or you have downloaded a new
204version, follow the same steps as for |mysyntaxfile| above. Just make sure
205that you write the syntax file in a directory that is early in 'runtimepath'.
Bram Moolenaar61d35bd2012-03-28 20:51:51 +0200206Vim will only load the first syntax file found, assuming that it sets
207b:current_syntax.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000208
209
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100210NAMING CONVENTIONS *group-name* *{group-name}* *E669* *W18*
211
212A syntax group name is to be used for syntax items that match the same kind of
213thing. These are then linked to a highlight group that specifies the color.
214A syntax group name doesn't specify any color or attributes itself.
215
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000216The name for a highlight or syntax group must consist of ASCII letters, digits
Bram Moolenaar2b8388b2015-02-28 13:11:45 +0100217and the underscore. As a regexp: "[a-zA-Z0-9_]*". However, Vim does not give
218an error when using other characters.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000219
220To be able to allow each user to pick his favorite set of colors, there must
221be preferred names for highlight groups that are common for many languages.
222These are the suggested group names (if syntax highlighting works properly
223you can see the actual color, except for "Ignore"):
224
225 *Comment any comment
226
227 *Constant any constant
228 String a string constant: "this is a string"
229 Character a character constant: 'c', '\n'
230 Number a number constant: 234, 0xff
231 Boolean a boolean constant: TRUE, false
232 Float a floating point constant: 2.3e10
233
234 *Identifier any variable name
235 Function function name (also: methods for classes)
236
237 *Statement any statement
238 Conditional if, then, else, endif, switch, etc.
239 Repeat for, do, while, etc.
240 Label case, default, etc.
241 Operator "sizeof", "+", "*", etc.
242 Keyword any other keyword
243 Exception try, catch, throw
244
245 *PreProc generic Preprocessor
246 Include preprocessor #include
247 Define preprocessor #define
248 Macro same as Define
249 PreCondit preprocessor #if, #else, #endif, etc.
250
251 *Type int, long, char, etc.
252 StorageClass static, register, volatile, etc.
253 Structure struct, union, enum, etc.
254 Typedef A typedef
255
256 *Special any special symbol
257 SpecialChar special character in a constant
258 Tag you can use CTRL-] on this
259 Delimiter character that needs attention
260 SpecialComment special things inside a comment
261 Debug debugging statements
262
263 *Underlined text that stands out, HTML links
264
Bram Moolenaar4f99eae2010-07-24 15:56:43 +0200265 *Ignore left blank, hidden |hl-Ignore|
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000266
267 *Error any erroneous construct
268
269 *Todo anything that needs extra attention; mostly the
270 keywords TODO FIXME and XXX
271
272The names marked with * are the preferred groups; the others are minor groups.
273For the preferred groups, the "syntax.vim" file contains default highlighting.
274The minor groups are linked to the preferred groups, so they get the same
275highlighting. You can override these defaults by using ":highlight" commands
276after sourcing the "syntax.vim" file.
277
278Note that highlight group names are not case sensitive. "String" and "string"
279can be used for the same group.
280
281The following names are reserved and cannot be used as a group name:
282 NONE ALL ALLBUT contains contained
283
Bram Moolenaar4f99eae2010-07-24 15:56:43 +0200284 *hl-Ignore*
285When using the Ignore group, you may also consider using the conceal
286mechanism. See |conceal|.
287
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000288==============================================================================
2893. Syntax loading procedure *syntax-loading*
290
291This explains the details that happen when the command ":syntax enable" is
292issued. When Vim initializes itself, it finds out where the runtime files are
293located. This is used here as the variable |$VIMRUNTIME|.
294
295":syntax enable" and ":syntax on" do the following:
296
297 Source $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim
298 |
299 +- Clear out any old syntax by sourcing $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/nosyntax.vim
300 |
301 +- Source first syntax/synload.vim in 'runtimepath'
302 | |
303 | +- Setup the colors for syntax highlighting. If a color scheme is
304 | | defined it is loaded again with ":colors {name}". Otherwise
305 | | ":runtime! syntax/syncolor.vim" is used. ":syntax on" overrules
306 | | existing colors, ":syntax enable" only sets groups that weren't
307 | | set yet.
308 | |
309 | +- Set up syntax autocmds to load the appropriate syntax file when
310 | | the 'syntax' option is set. *synload-1*
311 | |
312 | +- Source the user's optional file, from the |mysyntaxfile| variable.
313 | This is for backwards compatibility with Vim 5.x only. *synload-2*
314 |
315 +- Do ":filetype on", which does ":runtime! filetype.vim". It loads any
316 | filetype.vim files found. It should always Source
317 | $VIMRUNTIME/filetype.vim, which does the following.
318 | |
319 | +- Install autocmds based on suffix to set the 'filetype' option
320 | | This is where the connection between file name and file type is
321 | | made for known file types. *synload-3*
322 | |
323 | +- Source the user's optional file, from the *myfiletypefile*
324 | | variable. This is for backwards compatibility with Vim 5.x only.
325 | | *synload-4*
326 | |
327 | +- Install one autocommand which sources scripts.vim when no file
328 | | type was detected yet. *synload-5*
329 | |
330 | +- Source $VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim, to setup the Syntax menu. |menu.vim|
331 |
332 +- Install a FileType autocommand to set the 'syntax' option when a file
333 | type has been detected. *synload-6*
334 |
335 +- Execute syntax autocommands to start syntax highlighting for each
336 already loaded buffer.
337
338
339Upon loading a file, Vim finds the relevant syntax file as follows:
340
341 Loading the file triggers the BufReadPost autocommands.
342 |
343 +- If there is a match with one of the autocommands from |synload-3|
344 | (known file types) or |synload-4| (user's file types), the 'filetype'
345 | option is set to the file type.
346 |
347 +- The autocommand at |synload-5| is triggered. If the file type was not
348 | found yet, then scripts.vim is searched for in 'runtimepath'. This
349 | should always load $VIMRUNTIME/scripts.vim, which does the following.
350 | |
351 | +- Source the user's optional file, from the *myscriptsfile*
352 | | variable. This is for backwards compatibility with Vim 5.x only.
353 | |
354 | +- If the file type is still unknown, check the contents of the file,
355 | again with checks like "getline(1) =~ pattern" as to whether the
356 | file type can be recognized, and set 'filetype'.
357 |
358 +- When the file type was determined and 'filetype' was set, this
359 | triggers the FileType autocommand |synload-6| above. It sets
360 | 'syntax' to the determined file type.
361 |
362 +- When the 'syntax' option was set above, this triggers an autocommand
363 | from |synload-1| (and |synload-2|). This find the main syntax file in
364 | 'runtimepath', with this command:
365 | runtime! syntax/<name>.vim
366 |
367 +- Any other user installed FileType or Syntax autocommands are
368 triggered. This can be used to change the highlighting for a specific
369 syntax.
370
371==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +01003724. Conversion to HTML *2html.vim* *convert-to-HTML*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000373
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +01003742html is not a syntax file itself, but a script that converts the current
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200375window into HTML. Vim opens a new window in which it builds the HTML file.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000376
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200377After you save the resulting file, you can view it with any browser. The
378colors should be exactly the same as you see them in Vim. With
379|g:html_line_ids| you can jump to specific lines by adding (for example) #L123
380or #123 to the end of the URL in your browser's address bar. And with
Bram Moolenaar543b7ef2013-06-01 14:50:56 +0200381|g:html_dynamic_folds| enabled, you can show or hide the text that is folded
382in Vim.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200383
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000384You are not supposed to set the 'filetype' or 'syntax' option to "2html"!
385Source the script to convert the current file: >
386
387 :runtime! syntax/2html.vim
388<
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200389Many variables affect the output of 2html.vim; see below. Any of the on/off
390options listed below can be enabled or disabled by setting them explicitly to
391the desired value, or restored to their default by removing the variable using
392|:unlet|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000393
394Remarks:
Bram Moolenaar076e8b22010-08-05 21:54:00 +0200395- Some truly ancient browsers may not show the background colors.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000396- From most browsers you can also print the file (in color)!
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200397- The latest TOhtml may actually work with older versions of Vim, but some
Bram Moolenaar166af9b2010-11-16 20:34:40 +0100398 features such as conceal support will not function, and the colors may be
399 incorrect for an old Vim without GUI support compiled in.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000400
401Here is an example how to run the script over all .c and .h files from a
402Unix shell: >
403 for f in *.[ch]; do gvim -f +"syn on" +"run! syntax/2html.vim" +"wq" +"q" $f; done
404<
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200405 *g:html_start_line* *g:html_end_line*
406To restrict the conversion to a range of lines, use a range with the |:TOhtml|
407command below, or set "g:html_start_line" and "g:html_end_line" to the first
408and last line to be converted. Example, using the last set Visual area: >
409
410 :let g:html_start_line = line("'<")
411 :let g:html_end_line = line("'>")
412 :runtime! syntax/2html.vim
413<
414 *:TOhtml*
415:[range]TOhtml The ":TOhtml" command is defined in a standard plugin.
416 This command will source |2html.vim| for you. When a
Bram Moolenaar60cce2f2015-10-13 23:21:27 +0200417 range is given, this command sets |g:html_start_line|
418 and |g:html_end_line| to the start and end of the
419 range, respectively. Default range is the entire
420 buffer.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200421
Bram Moolenaar60cce2f2015-10-13 23:21:27 +0200422 If the current window is part of a |diff|, unless
423 |g:html_diff_one_file| is set, :TOhtml will convert
424 all windows which are part of the diff in the current
425 tab and place them side-by-side in a <table> element
426 in the generated HTML. With |g:html_line_ids| you can
427 jump to lines in specific windows with (for example)
428 #W1L42 for line 42 in the first diffed window, or
429 #W3L87 for line 87 in the third.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200430
431 Examples: >
432
433 :10,40TOhtml " convert lines 10-40 to html
434 :'<,'>TOhtml " convert current/last visual selection
435 :TOhtml " convert entire buffer
436<
437 *g:html_diff_one_file*
438Default: 0.
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200439When 0, and using |:TOhtml| all windows involved in a |diff| in the current tab
440page are converted to HTML and placed side-by-side in a <table> element. When
4411, only the current buffer is converted.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200442Example: >
443
444 let g:html_diff_one_file = 1
445<
446 *g:html_whole_filler*
447Default: 0.
448When 0, if |g:html_diff_one_file| is 1, a sequence of more than 3 filler lines
449is displayed as three lines with the middle line mentioning the total number
450of inserted lines.
451When 1, always display all inserted lines as if |g:html_diff_one_file| were
452not set.
453>
454 :let g:html_whole_filler = 1
455<
456 *TOhtml-performance* *g:html_no_progress*
457Default: 0.
458When 0, display a progress bar in the statusline for each major step in the
4592html.vim conversion process.
460When 1, do not display the progress bar. This offers a minor speed improvement
461but you won't have any idea how much longer the conversion might take; for big
462files it can take a long time!
463Example: >
464
465 let g:html_no_progress = 1
466<
467You can obtain better performance improvements by also instructing Vim to not
468run interactively, so that too much time is not taken to redraw as the script
469moves through the buffer, switches windows, and the like: >
470
471 vim -E -s -c "let g:html_no_progress=1" -c "syntax on" -c "set ft=c" -c "runtime syntax/2html.vim" -cwqa myfile.c
472<
473Note that the -s flag prevents loading your .vimrc and any plugins, so you
474need to explicitly source/enable anything that will affect the HTML
475conversion. See |-E| and |-s-ex| for details. It is probably best to create a
476script to replace all the -c commands and use it with the -u flag instead of
477specifying each command separately.
478
Bram Moolenaar09c6f262019-11-17 15:55:14 +0100479 *hl-TOhtmlProgress* *TOhtml-progress-color*
480When displayed, the progress bar will show colored boxes along the statusline
481as the HTML conversion proceeds. By default, the background color as the
482current "DiffDelete" highlight group is used. If "DiffDelete" and "StatusLine"
483have the same background color, TOhtml will automatically adjust the color to
484differ. If you do not like the automatically selected colors, you can define
485your own highlight colors for the progress bar. Example: >
486
487 hi TOhtmlProgress guifg=#c0ffee ctermbg=7
488<
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200489 *g:html_number_lines*
490Default: current 'number' setting.
491When 0, buffer text is displayed in the generated HTML without line numbering.
492When 1, a column of line numbers is added to the generated HTML with the same
493highlighting as the line number column in Vim (|hl-LineNr|).
494Force line numbers even if 'number' is not set: >
495 :let g:html_number_lines = 1
496Force to omit the line numbers: >
497 :let g:html_number_lines = 0
498Go back to the default to use 'number' by deleting the variable: >
499 :unlet g:html_number_lines
500<
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200501 *g:html_line_ids*
502Default: 1 if |g:html_number_lines| is set, 0 otherwise.
503When 1, adds an HTML id attribute to each line number, or to an empty <span>
504inserted for that purpose if no line numbers are shown. This ID attribute
505takes the form of L123 for single-buffer HTML pages, or W2L123 for diff-view
506pages, and is used to jump to a specific line (in a specific window of a diff
507view). Javascript is inserted to open any closed dynamic folds
Bram Moolenaar34401cc2014-08-29 15:12:19 +0200508(|g:html_dynamic_folds|) containing the specified line before jumping. The
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200509javascript also allows omitting the window ID in the url, and the leading L.
510For example: >
511
512 page.html#L123 jumps to line 123 in a single-buffer file
513 page.html#123 does the same
514
515 diff.html#W1L42 jumps to line 42 in the first window in a diff
516 diff.html#42 does the same
517<
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200518 *g:html_use_css*
519Default: 1.
Bram Moolenaar09c6f262019-11-17 15:55:14 +0100520When 1, generate valid HTML 5 markup with CSS styling, supported in all modern
521browsers and many old browsers.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200522When 0, generate <font> tags and similar outdated markup. This is not
523recommended but it may work better in really old browsers, email clients,
524forum posts, and similar situations where basic CSS support is unavailable.
525Example: >
526 :let g:html_use_css = 0
527<
528 *g:html_ignore_conceal*
529Default: 0.
530When 0, concealed text is removed from the HTML and replaced with a character
531from |:syn-cchar| or 'listchars' as appropriate, depending on the current
532value of 'conceallevel'.
533When 1, include all text from the buffer in the generated HTML, even if it is
534|conceal|ed.
535
536Either of the following commands will ensure that all text in the buffer is
537included in the generated HTML (unless it is folded): >
538 :let g:html_ignore_conceal = 1
539 :setl conceallevel=0
540<
541 *g:html_ignore_folding*
542Default: 0.
543When 0, text in a closed fold is replaced by the text shown for the fold in
544Vim (|fold-foldtext|). See |g:html_dynamic_folds| if you also want to allow
545the user to expand the fold as in Vim to see the text inside.
546When 1, include all text from the buffer in the generated HTML; whether the
547text is in a fold has no impact at all. |g:html_dynamic_folds| has no effect.
548
549Either of these commands will ensure that all text in the buffer is included
550in the generated HTML (unless it is concealed): >
551 zR
552 :let g:html_ignore_folding = 1
553<
554 *g:html_dynamic_folds*
555Default: 0.
556When 0, text in a closed fold is not included at all in the generated HTML.
557When 1, generate javascript to open a fold and show the text within, just like
558in Vim.
559
560Setting this variable to 1 causes 2html.vim to always use CSS for styling,
561regardless of what |g:html_use_css| is set to.
562
563This variable is ignored when |g:html_ignore_folding| is set.
564>
565 :let g:html_dynamic_folds = 1
566<
567 *g:html_no_foldcolumn*
568Default: 0.
569When 0, if |g:html_dynamic_folds| is 1, generate a column of text similar to
570Vim's foldcolumn (|fold-foldcolumn|) the user can click on to toggle folds
571open or closed. The minimum width of the generated text column is the current
572'foldcolumn' setting.
573When 1, do not generate this column; instead, hovering the mouse cursor over
574folded text will open the fold as if |g:html_hover_unfold| were set.
575>
576 :let g:html_no_foldcolumn = 1
577<
578 *TOhtml-uncopyable-text* *g:html_prevent_copy*
579Default: empty string.
580This option prevents certain regions of the generated HTML from being copied,
581when you select all text in document rendered in a browser and copy it. Useful
582for allowing users to copy-paste only the source text even if a fold column or
583line numbers are shown in the generated content. Specify regions to be
584affected in this way as follows:
585 f: fold column
586 n: line numbers (also within fold text)
587 t: fold text
588 d: diff filler
589
590Example, to make the fold column and line numbers uncopyable: >
591 :let g:html_prevent_copy = "fn"
592<
Bram Moolenaar09c6f262019-11-17 15:55:14 +0100593The method used to prevent copying in the generated page depends on the value
594of |g:html_use_input_for_pc|.
595
596 *g:html_use_input_for_pc*
597Default: "fallback"
598If |g:html_prevent_copy| is non-empty, then:
599
600When "all", read-only <input> elements are used in place of normal text for
601uncopyable regions. In some browsers, especially older browsers, after
602selecting an entire page and copying the selection, the <input> tags are not
603pasted with the page text. If |g:html_no_invalid| is 0, the <input> tags have
604invalid type; this works in more browsers, but the page will not validate.
605Note: this method does NOT work in recent versions of Chrome and equivalent
606browsers; the <input> tags get pasted with the text.
607
608When "fallback" (default value), the same <input> elements are generated for
609older browsers, but newer browsers (detected by CSS feature query) hide the
610<input> elements and instead use generated content in an ::before pseudoelement
611to display the uncopyable text. This method should work with the largest
612number of browsers, both old and new.
613
614When "none", the <input> elements are not generated at all. Only the
615generated-content method is used. This means that old browsers, notably
616Internet Explorer, will either copy the text intended not to be copyable, or
617the non-copyable text may not appear at all. However, this is the most
618standards-based method, and there will be much less markup.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200619
620 *g:html_no_invalid*
621Default: 0.
Bram Moolenaar09c6f262019-11-17 15:55:14 +0100622When 0, if |g:html_prevent_copy| is non-empty and |g:html_use_input_for_pc| is
623not "none", an invalid attribute is intentionally inserted into the <input>
624element for the uncopyable areas. This prevents pasting the <input> elements
625in some applications. Specifically, some versions of Microsoft Word will not
626paste the <input> elements if they contain this invalid attribute. When 1, no
627invalid markup is inserted, and the generated page should validate. However,
628<input> elements may be pasted into some applications and can be difficult to
629remove afterward.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200630
631 *g:html_hover_unfold*
632Default: 0.
633When 0, the only way to open a fold generated by 2html.vim with
634|g:html_dynamic_folds| set, is to click on the generated fold column.
635When 1, use CSS 2.0 to allow the user to open a fold by moving the mouse
636cursor over the displayed fold text. This is useful to allow users with
637disabled javascript to view the folded text.
638
639Note that old browsers (notably Internet Explorer 6) will not support this
640feature. Browser-specific markup for IE6 is included to fall back to the
641normal CSS1 styling so that the folds show up correctly for this browser, but
642they will not be openable without a foldcolumn.
643>
644 :let g:html_hover_unfold = 1
645<
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200646 *g:html_id_expr*
647Default: ""
648Dynamic folding and jumping to line IDs rely on unique IDs within the document
649to work. If generated HTML is copied into a larger document, these IDs are no
650longer guaranteed to be unique. Set g:html_id_expr to an expression Vim can
651evaluate to get a unique string to append to each ID used in a given document,
652so that the full IDs will be unique even when combined with other content in a
653larger HTML document. Example, to append _ and the buffer number to each ID: >
654
655 :let g:html_id_expr = '"_".bufnr("%")'
656<
657To append a string "_mystring" to the end of each ID: >
658
659 :let g:html_id_expr = '"_mystring"'
660<
661Note, when converting a diff view to HTML, the expression will only be
662evaluated for the first window in the diff, and the result used for all the
663windows.
664
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200665 *TOhtml-wrap-text* *g:html_pre_wrap*
666Default: current 'wrap' setting.
667When 0, if |g:html_no_pre| is 0 or unset, the text in the generated HTML does
668not wrap at the edge of the browser window.
669When 1, if |g:html_use_css| is 1, the CSS 2.0 "white-space:pre-wrap" value is
670used, causing the text to wrap at whitespace at the edge of the browser
671window.
672Explicitly enable text wrapping: >
673 :let g:html_pre_wrap = 1
674Explicitly disable wrapping: >
675 :let g:html_pre_wrap = 0
676Go back to default, determine wrapping from 'wrap' setting: >
677 :unlet g:html_pre_wrap
678<
679 *g:html_no_pre*
680Default: 0.
681When 0, buffer text in the generated HTML is surrounded by <pre>...</pre>
682tags. Series of whitespace is shown as in Vim without special markup, and tab
683characters can be included literally (see |g:html_expand_tabs|).
684When 1 (not recommended), the <pre> tags are omitted, and a plain <div> is
685used instead. Whitespace is replaced by a series of &nbsp; character
686references, and <br> is used to end each line. This is another way to allow
687text in the generated HTML is wrap (see |g:html_pre_wrap|) which also works in
688old browsers, but may cause noticeable differences between Vim's display and
689the rendered page generated by 2html.vim.
690>
691 :let g:html_no_pre = 1
692<
693 *g:html_expand_tabs*
Bram Moolenaarf0d58ef2018-11-16 16:13:44 +0100694Default: 0 if 'tabstop' is 8, 'expandtab' is 0, 'vartabstop' is not in use,
695 and no fold column or line numbers occur in the generated HTML;
696 1 otherwise.
697When 1, <Tab> characters in the buffer text are replaced with an appropriate
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200698number of space characters, or &nbsp; references if |g:html_no_pre| is 1.
Bram Moolenaarf0d58ef2018-11-16 16:13:44 +0100699When 0, if |g:html_no_pre| is 0 or unset, <Tab> characters in the buffer text
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200700are included as-is in the generated HTML. This is useful for when you want to
701allow copy and paste from a browser without losing the actual whitespace in
702the source document. Note that this can easily break text alignment and
703indentation in the HTML, unless set by default.
704
705Force |2html.vim| to keep <Tab> characters: >
706 :let g:html_expand_tabs = 0
707<
708Force tabs to be expanded: >
709 :let g:html_expand_tabs = 1
710<
711 *TOhtml-encoding-detect* *TOhtml-encoding*
712It is highly recommended to set your desired encoding with
713|g:html_use_encoding| for any content which will be placed on a web server.
714
715If you do not specify an encoding, |2html.vim| uses the preferred IANA name
716for the current value of 'fileencoding' if set, or 'encoding' if not.
717'encoding' is always used for certain 'buftype' values. 'fileencoding' will be
718set to match the chosen document encoding.
719
720Automatic detection works for the encodings mentioned specifically by name in
721|encoding-names|, but TOhtml will only automatically use those encodings with
722wide browser support. However, you can override this to support specific
723encodings that may not be automatically detected by default (see options
724below). See http://www.iana.org/assignments/character-sets for the IANA names.
725
726Note, by default all Unicode encodings are converted to UTF-8 with no BOM in
727the generated HTML, as recommended by W3C:
728
729 http://www.w3.org/International/questions/qa-choosing-encodings
730 http://www.w3.org/International/questions/qa-byte-order-mark
731
732 *g:html_use_encoding*
733Default: none, uses IANA name for current 'fileencoding' as above.
734To overrule all automatic charset detection, set g:html_use_encoding to the
735name of the charset to be used. It is recommended to set this variable to
736something widely supported, like UTF-8, for anything you will be hosting on a
737webserver: >
738 :let g:html_use_encoding = "UTF-8"
739You can also use this option to omit the line that specifies the charset
740entirely, by setting g:html_use_encoding to an empty string (NOT recommended): >
741 :let g:html_use_encoding = ""
742To go back to the automatic mechanism, delete the |g:html_use_encoding|
743variable: >
744 :unlet g:html_use_encoding
745<
746 *g:html_encoding_override*
747Default: none, autoload/tohtml.vim contains default conversions for encodings
748 mentioned by name at |encoding-names|.
749This option allows |2html.vim| to detect the correct 'fileencoding' when you
750specify an encoding with |g:html_use_encoding| which is not in the default
751list of conversions.
752
753This is a dictionary of charset-encoding pairs that will replace existing
754pairs automatically detected by TOhtml, or supplement with new pairs.
755
756Detect the HTML charset "windows-1252" as the encoding "8bit-cp1252": >
757 :let g:html_encoding_override = {'windows-1252': '8bit-cp1252'}
758<
759 *g:html_charset_override*
760Default: none, autoload/tohtml.vim contains default conversions for encodings
761 mentioned by name at |encoding-names| and which have wide
762 browser support.
763This option allows |2html.vim| to detect the HTML charset for any
764'fileencoding' or 'encoding' which is not detected automatically. You can also
765use it to override specific existing encoding-charset pairs. For example,
766TOhtml will by default use UTF-8 for all Unicode/UCS encodings. To use UTF-16
767and UTF-32 instead, use: >
768 :let g:html_charset_override = {'ucs-4': 'UTF-32', 'utf-16': 'UTF-16'}
769
770Note that documents encoded in either UTF-32 or UTF-16 have known
771compatibility problems with some major browsers.
772
Bram Moolenaar60cce2f2015-10-13 23:21:27 +0200773 *g:html_font*
774Default: "monospace"
775You can specify the font or fonts used in the converted document using
776g:html_font. If this option is set to a string, then the value will be
777surrounded with single quotes. If this option is set to a list then each list
778item is surrounded by single quotes and the list is joined with commas. Either
779way, "monospace" is added as the fallback generic family name and the entire
780result used as the font family (using CSS) or font face (if not using CSS).
781Examples: >
782
783 " font-family: 'Consolas', monospace;
784 :let g:html_font = "Consolas"
785
786 " font-family: 'DejaVu Sans Mono', 'Consolas', monospace;
787 :let g:html_font = ["DejaVu Sans Mono", "Consolas"]
788<
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200789 *convert-to-XML* *convert-to-XHTML* *g:html_use_xhtml*
790Default: 0.
791When 0, generate standard HTML 4.01 (strict when possible).
792When 1, generate XHTML 1.0 instead (XML compliant HTML).
793>
794 :let g:html_use_xhtml = 1
795<
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100796==============================================================================
7975. Syntax file remarks *:syn-file-remarks*
798
799 *b:current_syntax-variable*
800Vim stores the name of the syntax that has been loaded in the
801"b:current_syntax" variable. You can use this if you want to load other
802settings, depending on which syntax is active. Example: >
803 :au BufReadPost * if b:current_syntax == "csh"
804 :au BufReadPost * do-some-things
805 :au BufReadPost * endif
806
807
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000808
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000809ABEL *abel.vim* *ft-abel-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000810
811ABEL highlighting provides some user-defined options. To enable them, assign
812any value to the respective variable. Example: >
813 :let abel_obsolete_ok=1
814To disable them use ":unlet". Example: >
815 :unlet abel_obsolete_ok
816
817Variable Highlight ~
818abel_obsolete_ok obsolete keywords are statements, not errors
819abel_cpp_comments_illegal do not interpret '//' as inline comment leader
820
821
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +0000822ADA
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000823
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +0000824See |ft-ada-syntax|
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000825
826
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000827ANT *ant.vim* *ft-ant-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000828
829The ant syntax file provides syntax highlighting for javascript and python
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000830by default. Syntax highlighting for other script languages can be installed
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000831by the function AntSyntaxScript(), which takes the tag name as first argument
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000832and the script syntax file name as second argument. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000833
834 :call AntSyntaxScript('perl', 'perl.vim')
835
836will install syntax perl highlighting for the following ant code >
837
838 <script language = 'perl'><![CDATA[
839 # everything inside is highlighted as perl
840 ]]></script>
841
842See |mysyntaxfile-add| for installing script languages permanently.
843
844
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000845APACHE *apache.vim* *ft-apache-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000846
Bram Moolenaar01164a62017-11-02 22:58:42 +0100847The apache syntax file provides syntax highlighting for Apache HTTP server
848version 2.2.3.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000849
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000850
851 *asm.vim* *asmh8300.vim* *nasm.vim* *masm.vim* *asm68k*
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000852ASSEMBLY *ft-asm-syntax* *ft-asmh8300-syntax* *ft-nasm-syntax*
853 *ft-masm-syntax* *ft-asm68k-syntax* *fasm.vim*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000854
855Files matching "*.i" could be Progress or Assembly. If the automatic detection
856doesn't work for you, or you don't edit Progress at all, use this in your
857startup vimrc: >
858 :let filetype_i = "asm"
859Replace "asm" with the type of assembly you use.
860
861There are many types of assembly languages that all use the same file name
862extensions. Therefore you will have to select the type yourself, or add a
863line in the assembly file that Vim will recognize. Currently these syntax
864files are included:
865 asm GNU assembly (the default)
866 asm68k Motorola 680x0 assembly
867 asmh8300 Hitachi H-8300 version of GNU assembly
868 ia64 Intel Itanium 64
869 fasm Flat assembly (http://flatassembler.net)
870 masm Microsoft assembly (probably works for any 80x86)
871 nasm Netwide assembly
872 tasm Turbo Assembly (with opcodes 80x86 up to Pentium, and
873 MMX)
874 pic PIC assembly (currently for PIC16F84)
875
876The most flexible is to add a line in your assembly file containing: >
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100877 asmsyntax=nasm
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000878Replace "nasm" with the name of the real assembly syntax. This line must be
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100879one of the first five lines in the file. No non-white text must be
Bram Moolenaar30b65812012-07-12 22:01:11 +0200880immediately before or after this text. Note that specifying asmsyntax=foo is
881equivalent to setting ft=foo in a |modeline|, and that in case of a conflict
882between the two settings the one from the modeline will take precedence (in
883particular, if you have ft=asm in the modeline, you will get the GNU syntax
884highlighting regardless of what is specified as asmsyntax).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000885
886The syntax type can always be overruled for a specific buffer by setting the
887b:asmsyntax variable: >
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000888 :let b:asmsyntax = "nasm"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000889
890If b:asmsyntax is not set, either automatically or by hand, then the value of
891the global variable asmsyntax is used. This can be seen as a default assembly
892language: >
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000893 :let asmsyntax = "nasm"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000894
895As a last resort, if nothing is defined, the "asm" syntax is used.
896
897
898Netwide assembler (nasm.vim) optional highlighting ~
899
900To enable a feature: >
901 :let {variable}=1|set syntax=nasm
902To disable a feature: >
903 :unlet {variable} |set syntax=nasm
904
905Variable Highlight ~
906nasm_loose_syntax unofficial parser allowed syntax not as Error
907 (parser dependent; not recommended)
908nasm_ctx_outside_macro contexts outside macro not as Error
909nasm_no_warn potentially risky syntax not as ToDo
910
911
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000912ASPPERL and ASPVBS *ft-aspperl-syntax* *ft-aspvbs-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000913
914*.asp and *.asa files could be either Perl or Visual Basic script. Since it's
915hard to detect this you can set two global variables to tell Vim what you are
916using. For Perl script use: >
917 :let g:filetype_asa = "aspperl"
918 :let g:filetype_asp = "aspperl"
919For Visual Basic use: >
920 :let g:filetype_asa = "aspvbs"
921 :let g:filetype_asp = "aspvbs"
922
923
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000924BAAN *baan.vim* *baan-syntax*
Bram Moolenaarf193fff2006-04-27 00:02:13 +0000925
926The baan.vim gives syntax support for BaanC of release BaanIV upto SSA ERP LN
927for both 3 GL and 4 GL programming. Large number of standard defines/constants
928are supported.
929
930Some special violation of coding standards will be signalled when one specify
931in ones |.vimrc|: >
932 let baan_code_stds=1
933
934*baan-folding*
935
936Syntax folding can be enabled at various levels through the variables
937mentioned below (Set those in your |.vimrc|). The more complex folding on
938source blocks and SQL can be CPU intensive.
939
940To allow any folding and enable folding at function level use: >
941 let baan_fold=1
942Folding can be enabled at source block level as if, while, for ,... The
943indentation preceding the begin/end keywords has to match (spaces are not
944considered equal to a tab). >
945 let baan_fold_block=1
946Folding can be enabled for embedded SQL blocks as SELECT, SELECTDO,
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000947SELECTEMPTY, ... The indentation preceding the begin/end keywords has to
Bram Moolenaarf193fff2006-04-27 00:02:13 +0000948match (spaces are not considered equal to a tab). >
949 let baan_fold_sql=1
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000950Note: Block folding can result in many small folds. It is suggested to |:set|
Bram Moolenaarf193fff2006-04-27 00:02:13 +0000951the options 'foldminlines' and 'foldnestmax' in |.vimrc| or use |:setlocal| in
952.../after/syntax/baan.vim (see |after-directory|). Eg: >
953 set foldminlines=5
954 set foldnestmax=6
955
956
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000957BASIC *basic.vim* *vb.vim* *ft-basic-syntax* *ft-vb-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000958
959Both Visual Basic and "normal" basic use the extension ".bas". To detect
960which one should be used, Vim checks for the string "VB_Name" in the first
961five lines of the file. If it is not found, filetype will be "basic",
962otherwise "vb". Files with the ".frm" extension will always be seen as Visual
963Basic.
964
965
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000966C *c.vim* *ft-c-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000967
968A few things in C highlighting are optional. To enable them assign any value
Bram Moolenaar91359012019-11-30 17:57:03 +0100969(including zero) to the respective variable. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000970 :let c_comment_strings = 1
Bram Moolenaar91359012019-11-30 17:57:03 +0100971 :let c_no_bracket_error = 0
972To disable them use `:unlet`. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000973 :unlet c_comment_strings
Bram Moolenaar91359012019-11-30 17:57:03 +0100974Setting the value to zero doesn't work!
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000975
Bram Moolenaarba3ff532018-11-04 14:45:49 +0100976An alternative is to switch to the C++ highlighting: >
977 :set filetype=cpp
978
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000979Variable Highlight ~
Bram Moolenaar03413f42016-04-12 21:07:15 +0200980*c_gnu* GNU gcc specific items
981*c_comment_strings* strings and numbers inside a comment
982*c_space_errors* trailing white space and spaces before a <Tab>
983*c_no_trail_space_error* ... but no trailing spaces
984*c_no_tab_space_error* ... but no spaces before a <Tab>
985*c_no_bracket_error* don't highlight {}; inside [] as errors
986*c_no_curly_error* don't highlight {}; inside [] and () as errors;
Bram Moolenaar677ee682005-01-27 14:41:15 +0000987 except { and } in first column
Bram Moolenaar09521312016-08-12 22:54:35 +0200988 Default is to highlight them, otherwise you
989 can't spot a missing ")".
Bram Moolenaar91359012019-11-30 17:57:03 +0100990*c_curly_error* highlight a missing } by finding all pairs; this
991 forces syncing from the start of the file, can be slow
Bram Moolenaar03413f42016-04-12 21:07:15 +0200992*c_no_ansi* don't do standard ANSI types and constants
993*c_ansi_typedefs* ... but do standard ANSI types
994*c_ansi_constants* ... but do standard ANSI constants
995*c_no_utf* don't highlight \u and \U in strings
996*c_syntax_for_h* for *.h files use C syntax instead of C++ and use objc
Bram Moolenaar61d35bd2012-03-28 20:51:51 +0200997 syntax instead of objcpp
Bram Moolenaar03413f42016-04-12 21:07:15 +0200998*c_no_if0* don't highlight "#if 0" blocks as comments
999*c_no_cformat* don't highlight %-formats in strings
1000*c_no_c99* don't highlight C99 standard items
1001*c_no_c11* don't highlight C11 standard items
1002*c_no_bsd* don't highlight BSD specific types
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001003
Bram Moolenaar293ee4d2004-12-09 21:34:53 +00001004When 'foldmethod' is set to "syntax" then /* */ comments and { } blocks will
1005become a fold. If you don't want comments to become a fold use: >
1006 :let c_no_comment_fold = 1
Bram Moolenaarf9393ef2006-04-24 19:47:27 +00001007"#if 0" blocks are also folded, unless: >
1008 :let c_no_if0_fold = 1
Bram Moolenaar293ee4d2004-12-09 21:34:53 +00001009
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001010If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed
1011when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "c_minlines" internal variable
1012to a larger number: >
1013 :let c_minlines = 100
1014This will make the syntax synchronization start 100 lines before the first
1015displayed line. The default value is 50 (15 when c_no_if0 is set). The
1016disadvantage of using a larger number is that redrawing can become slow.
1017
1018When using the "#if 0" / "#endif" comment highlighting, notice that this only
1019works when the "#if 0" is within "c_minlines" from the top of the window. If
1020you have a long "#if 0" construct it will not be highlighted correctly.
1021
1022To match extra items in comments, use the cCommentGroup cluster.
1023Example: >
1024 :au Syntax c call MyCadd()
1025 :function MyCadd()
1026 : syn keyword cMyItem contained Ni
1027 : syn cluster cCommentGroup add=cMyItem
1028 : hi link cMyItem Title
1029 :endfun
1030
1031ANSI constants will be highlighted with the "cConstant" group. This includes
1032"NULL", "SIG_IGN" and others. But not "TRUE", for example, because this is
1033not in the ANSI standard. If you find this confusing, remove the cConstant
1034highlighting: >
1035 :hi link cConstant NONE
1036
1037If you see '{' and '}' highlighted as an error where they are OK, reset the
1038highlighting for cErrInParen and cErrInBracket.
1039
1040If you want to use folding in your C files, you can add these lines in a file
Bram Moolenaar06b5d512010-05-22 15:37:44 +02001041in the "after" directory in 'runtimepath'. For Unix this would be
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001042~/.vim/after/syntax/c.vim. >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001043 syn sync fromstart
1044 set foldmethod=syntax
1045
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001046CH *ch.vim* *ft-ch-syntax*
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00001047
1048C/C++ interpreter. Ch has similar syntax highlighting to C and builds upon
1049the C syntax file. See |c.vim| for all the settings that are available for C.
1050
1051By setting a variable you can tell Vim to use Ch syntax for *.h files, instead
1052of C or C++: >
1053 :let ch_syntax_for_h = 1
1054
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001055
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001056CHILL *chill.vim* *ft-chill-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001057
1058Chill syntax highlighting is similar to C. See |c.vim| for all the settings
1059that are available. Additionally there is:
1060
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001061chill_space_errors like c_space_errors
1062chill_comment_string like c_comment_strings
1063chill_minlines like c_minlines
1064
1065
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001066CHANGELOG *changelog.vim* *ft-changelog-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001067
1068ChangeLog supports highlighting spaces at the start of a line.
1069If you do not like this, add following line to your .vimrc: >
1070 let g:changelog_spacing_errors = 0
1071This works the next time you edit a changelog file. You can also use
1072"b:changelog_spacing_errors" to set this per buffer (before loading the syntax
1073file).
1074
1075You can change the highlighting used, e.g., to flag the spaces as an error: >
1076 :hi link ChangelogError Error
1077Or to avoid the highlighting: >
1078 :hi link ChangelogError NONE
1079This works immediately.
1080
1081
Bram Moolenaar76f3b1a2014-03-27 22:30:07 +01001082CLOJURE *ft-clojure-syntax*
1083
Bram Moolenaar6f1d9a02016-07-24 14:12:38 +02001084The default syntax groups can be augmented through the
1085*g:clojure_syntax_keywords* and *b:clojure_syntax_keywords* variables. The
1086value should be a |Dictionary| of syntax group names to a |List| of custom
1087identifiers:
1088>
1089 let g:clojure_syntax_keywords = {
1090 \ 'clojureMacro': ["defproject", "defcustom"],
1091 \ 'clojureFunc': ["string/join", "string/replace"]
1092 \ }
1093<
1094Refer to the Clojure syntax script for valid syntax group names.
1095
1096If the |buffer-variable| *b:clojure_syntax_without_core_keywords* is set, only
1097language constants and special forms are matched.
1098
Bram Moolenaar76f3b1a2014-03-27 22:30:07 +01001099Setting *g:clojure_fold* enables folding Clojure code via the syntax engine.
1100Any list, vector, or map that extends over more than one line can be folded
1101using the standard Vim |fold-commands|.
1102
1103Please note that this option does not work with scripts that redefine the
1104bracket syntax regions, such as rainbow-parentheses plugins.
1105
1106This option is off by default.
1107>
1108 " Default
1109 let g:clojure_fold = 0
1110<
1111
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001112COBOL *cobol.vim* *ft-cobol-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001113
1114COBOL highlighting has different needs for legacy code than it does for fresh
1115development. This is due to differences in what is being done (maintenance
1116versus development) and other factors. To enable legacy code highlighting,
1117add this line to your .vimrc: >
1118 :let cobol_legacy_code = 1
1119To disable it again, use this: >
1120 :unlet cobol_legacy_code
1121
1122
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001123COLD FUSION *coldfusion.vim* *ft-coldfusion-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001124
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001125The ColdFusion has its own version of HTML comments. To turn on ColdFusion
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001126comment highlighting, add the following line to your startup file: >
1127
1128 :let html_wrong_comments = 1
1129
1130The ColdFusion syntax file is based on the HTML syntax file.
1131
1132
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01001133CPP *cpp.vim* *ft-cpp-syntax*
1134
1135Most of things are same as |ft-c-syntax|.
1136
1137Variable Highlight ~
Bram Moolenaara0f849e2015-10-30 14:37:44 +01001138cpp_no_cpp11 don't highlight C++11 standard items
Bram Moolenaarb4ff5182015-11-10 21:15:48 +01001139cpp_no_cpp14 don't highlight C++14 standard items
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01001140
1141
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001142CSH *csh.vim* *ft-csh-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001143
1144This covers the shell named "csh". Note that on some systems tcsh is actually
1145used.
1146
1147Detecting whether a file is csh or tcsh is notoriously hard. Some systems
1148symlink /bin/csh to /bin/tcsh, making it almost impossible to distinguish
1149between csh and tcsh. In case VIM guesses wrong you can set the
Bram Moolenaar97293012011-07-18 19:40:27 +02001150"filetype_csh" variable. For using csh: *g:filetype_csh*
1151>
1152 :let g:filetype_csh = "csh"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001153
1154For using tcsh: >
1155
Bram Moolenaar97293012011-07-18 19:40:27 +02001156 :let g:filetype_csh = "tcsh"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001157
1158Any script with a tcsh extension or a standard tcsh filename (.tcshrc,
1159tcsh.tcshrc, tcsh.login) will have filetype tcsh. All other tcsh/csh scripts
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001160will be classified as tcsh, UNLESS the "filetype_csh" variable exists. If the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001161"filetype_csh" variable exists, the filetype will be set to the value of the
1162variable.
1163
1164
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001165CYNLIB *cynlib.vim* *ft-cynlib-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001166
1167Cynlib files are C++ files that use the Cynlib class library to enable
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001168hardware modelling and simulation using C++. Typically Cynlib files have a .cc
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001169or a .cpp extension, which makes it very difficult to distinguish them from a
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001170normal C++ file. Thus, to enable Cynlib highlighting for .cc files, add this
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001171line to your .vimrc file: >
1172
1173 :let cynlib_cyntax_for_cc=1
1174
1175Similarly for cpp files (this extension is only usually used in Windows) >
1176
1177 :let cynlib_cyntax_for_cpp=1
1178
1179To disable these again, use this: >
1180
1181 :unlet cynlib_cyntax_for_cc
1182 :unlet cynlib_cyntax_for_cpp
1183<
1184
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001185CWEB *cweb.vim* *ft-cweb-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001186
1187Files matching "*.w" could be Progress or cweb. If the automatic detection
1188doesn't work for you, or you don't edit Progress at all, use this in your
1189startup vimrc: >
1190 :let filetype_w = "cweb"
1191
1192
Bram Moolenaar96f45c02019-10-26 19:53:45 +02001193DART *dart.vim* *ft-dart-syntax*
1194
1195Dart is an object-oriented, typed, class defined, garbage collected language
1196used for developing mobile, desktop, web, and back-end applications. Dart uses
1197a C-like syntax derived from C, Java, and JavaScript, with features adopted
1198from Smalltalk, Python, Ruby, and others.
1199
1200More information about the language and its development environment at the
1201official Dart language website at https://dart.dev
1202
1203dart.vim syntax detects and highlights Dart statements, reserved words,
1204type declarations, storage classes, conditionals, loops, interpolated values,
1205and comments. There is no support idioms from Flutter or any other Dart
1206framework.
1207
1208Changes, fixes? Submit an issue or pull request via:
1209
1210https://github.com/pr3d4t0r/dart-vim-syntax/
1211
1212
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001213DESKTOP *desktop.vim* *ft-desktop-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001214
1215Primary goal of this syntax file is to highlight .desktop and .directory files
Bram Moolenaara17d4c12010-05-30 18:30:36 +02001216according to freedesktop.org standard:
1217http://standards.freedesktop.org/desktop-entry-spec/latest/
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001218But actually almost none implements this standard fully. Thus it will
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001219highlight all Unix ini files. But you can force strict highlighting according
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001220to standard by placing this in your vimrc file: >
1221 :let enforce_freedesktop_standard = 1
1222
1223
Bram Moolenaar8feef4f2015-01-07 16:57:10 +01001224DIFF *diff.vim*
1225
1226The diff highlighting normally finds translated headers. This can be slow if
1227there are very long lines in the file. To disable translations: >
1228
1229 :let diff_translations = 0
1230
Bram Moolenaar0122c402015-02-03 19:13:34 +01001231Also see |diff-slow|.
1232
Bram Moolenaar8feef4f2015-01-07 16:57:10 +01001233
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001234DIRCOLORS *dircolors.vim* *ft-dircolors-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001235
1236The dircolors utility highlighting definition has one option. It exists to
1237provide compatibility with the Slackware GNU/Linux distributions version of
1238the command. It adds a few keywords that are generally ignored by most
1239versions. On Slackware systems, however, the utility accepts the keywords and
1240uses them for processing. To enable the Slackware keywords add the following
1241line to your startup file: >
1242 let dircolors_is_slackware = 1
1243
1244
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001245DOCBOOK *docbk.vim* *ft-docbk-syntax* *docbook*
Bram Moolenaar81af9252010-12-10 20:35:50 +01001246DOCBOOK XML *docbkxml.vim* *ft-docbkxml-syntax*
1247DOCBOOK SGML *docbksgml.vim* *ft-docbksgml-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001248
1249There are two types of DocBook files: SGML and XML. To specify what type you
1250are using the "b:docbk_type" variable should be set. Vim does this for you
1251automatically if it can recognize the type. When Vim can't guess it the type
1252defaults to XML.
1253You can set the type manually: >
1254 :let docbk_type = "sgml"
1255or: >
1256 :let docbk_type = "xml"
1257You need to do this before loading the syntax file, which is complicated.
1258Simpler is setting the filetype to "docbkxml" or "docbksgml": >
1259 :set filetype=docbksgml
1260or: >
1261 :set filetype=docbkxml
1262
Bram Moolenaar2df58b42012-11-28 18:21:11 +01001263You can specify the DocBook version: >
1264 :let docbk_ver = 3
1265When not set 4 is used.
1266
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001267
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001268DOSBATCH *dosbatch.vim* *ft-dosbatch-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001269
1270There is one option with highlighting DOS batch files. This covers new
1271extensions to the Command Interpreter introduced with Windows 2000 and
1272is controlled by the variable dosbatch_cmdextversion. For Windows NT
1273this should have the value 1, and for Windows 2000 it should be 2.
1274Select the version you want with the following line: >
1275
Bram Moolenaar8299df92004-07-10 09:47:34 +00001276 :let dosbatch_cmdextversion = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001277
1278If this variable is not defined it defaults to a value of 2 to support
1279Windows 2000.
1280
Bram Moolenaar8299df92004-07-10 09:47:34 +00001281A second option covers whether *.btm files should be detected as type
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001282"dosbatch" (MS-DOS batch files) or type "btm" (4DOS batch files). The latter
1283is used by default. You may select the former with the following line: >
Bram Moolenaar8299df92004-07-10 09:47:34 +00001284
1285 :let g:dosbatch_syntax_for_btm = 1
1286
1287If this variable is undefined or zero, btm syntax is selected.
1288
1289
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001290DOXYGEN *doxygen.vim* *doxygen-syntax*
1291
1292Doxygen generates code documentation using a special documentation format
Bram Moolenaare37d50a2008-08-06 17:06:04 +00001293(similar to Javadoc). This syntax script adds doxygen highlighting to c, cpp,
1294idl and php files, and should also work with java.
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001295
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00001296There are a few of ways to turn on doxygen formatting. It can be done
1297explicitly or in a modeline by appending '.doxygen' to the syntax of the file.
1298Example: >
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001299 :set syntax=c.doxygen
1300or >
1301 // vim:syntax=c.doxygen
1302
Bram Moolenaar5dc62522012-02-13 00:05:22 +01001303It can also be done automatically for C, C++, C#, IDL and PHP files by setting
1304the global or buffer-local variable load_doxygen_syntax. This is done by
1305adding the following to your .vimrc. >
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001306 :let g:load_doxygen_syntax=1
1307
Bram Moolenaar06b5d512010-05-22 15:37:44 +02001308There are a couple of variables that have an effect on syntax highlighting, and
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001309are to do with non-standard highlighting options.
1310
1311Variable Default Effect ~
1312g:doxygen_enhanced_color
1313g:doxygen_enhanced_colour 0 Use non-standard highlighting for
1314 doxygen comments.
1315
1316doxygen_my_rendering 0 Disable rendering of HTML bold, italic
1317 and html_my_rendering underline.
1318
1319doxygen_javadoc_autobrief 1 Set to 0 to disable javadoc autobrief
1320 colour highlighting.
1321
1322doxygen_end_punctuation '[.]' Set to regexp match for the ending
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +00001323 punctuation of brief
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001324
Bram Moolenaarfc65cab2018-08-28 22:58:02 +02001325There are also some highlight groups worth mentioning as they can be useful in
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001326configuration.
1327
1328Highlight Effect ~
1329doxygenErrorComment The colour of an end-comment when missing
1330 punctuation in a code, verbatim or dot section
1331doxygenLinkError The colour of an end-comment when missing the
1332 \endlink from a \link section.
1333
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001334
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001335DTD *dtd.vim* *ft-dtd-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001336
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001337The DTD syntax highlighting is case sensitive by default. To disable
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001338case-sensitive highlighting, add the following line to your startup file: >
1339
1340 :let dtd_ignore_case=1
1341
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001342The DTD syntax file will highlight unknown tags as errors. If
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001343this is annoying, it can be turned off by setting: >
1344
1345 :let dtd_no_tag_errors=1
1346
1347before sourcing the dtd.vim syntax file.
1348Parameter entity names are highlighted in the definition using the
1349'Type' highlighting group and 'Comment' for punctuation and '%'.
1350Parameter entity instances are highlighted using the 'Constant'
1351highlighting group and the 'Type' highlighting group for the
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001352delimiters % and ;. This can be turned off by setting: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001353
1354 :let dtd_no_param_entities=1
1355
1356The DTD syntax file is also included by xml.vim to highlight included dtd's.
1357
1358
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001359EIFFEL *eiffel.vim* *ft-eiffel-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001360
1361While Eiffel is not case-sensitive, its style guidelines are, and the
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001362syntax highlighting file encourages their use. This also allows to
1363highlight class names differently. If you want to disable case-sensitive
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001364highlighting, add the following line to your startup file: >
1365
1366 :let eiffel_ignore_case=1
1367
1368Case still matters for class names and TODO marks in comments.
1369
1370Conversely, for even stricter checks, add one of the following lines: >
1371
1372 :let eiffel_strict=1
1373 :let eiffel_pedantic=1
1374
1375Setting eiffel_strict will only catch improper capitalization for the
1376five predefined words "Current", "Void", "Result", "Precursor", and
1377"NONE", to warn against their accidental use as feature or class names.
1378
1379Setting eiffel_pedantic will enforce adherence to the Eiffel style
1380guidelines fairly rigorously (like arbitrary mixes of upper- and
1381lowercase letters as well as outdated ways to capitalize keywords).
1382
1383If you want to use the lower-case version of "Current", "Void",
1384"Result", and "Precursor", you can use >
1385
1386 :let eiffel_lower_case_predef=1
1387
1388instead of completely turning case-sensitive highlighting off.
1389
1390Support for ISE's proposed new creation syntax that is already
1391experimentally handled by some compilers can be enabled by: >
1392
1393 :let eiffel_ise=1
1394
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001395Finally, some vendors support hexadecimal constants. To handle them, add >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001396
1397 :let eiffel_hex_constants=1
1398
1399to your startup file.
1400
1401
Bram Moolenaar08589172014-03-08 18:38:28 +01001402EUPHORIA *euphoria3.vim* *euphoria4.vim* *ft-euphoria-syntax*
1403
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01001404Two syntax highlighting files exists for Euphoria. One for Euphoria
1405version 3.1.1, which is the default syntax highlighting file, and one for
Bram Moolenaar08589172014-03-08 18:38:28 +01001406Euphoria version 4.0.5 or later.
1407
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01001408Euphoria version 3.1.1 (http://www.rapideuphoria.com/) is still necessary
1409for developing applications for the DOS platform, which Euphoria version 4
Bram Moolenaar08589172014-03-08 18:38:28 +01001410(http://www.openeuphoria.org/) does not support.
1411
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01001412The following file extensions are auto-detected as Euphoria file type:
1413
Bram Moolenaar08589172014-03-08 18:38:28 +01001414 *.e, *.eu, *.ew, *.ex, *.exu, *.exw
1415 *.E, *.EU, *.EW, *.EX, *.EXU, *.EXW
1416
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01001417To select syntax highlighting file for Euphoria, as well as for
Bram Moolenaar08589172014-03-08 18:38:28 +01001418auto-detecting the *.e and *.E file extensions as Euphoria file type,
1419add the following line to your startup file: >
1420
1421 :let filetype_euphoria="euphoria3"
1422
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01001423 or
Bram Moolenaar08589172014-03-08 18:38:28 +01001424
1425 :let filetype_euphoria="euphoria4"
1426
1427
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001428ERLANG *erlang.vim* *ft-erlang-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001429
Bram Moolenaarad3b3662013-05-17 18:14:19 +02001430Erlang is a functional programming language developed by Ericsson. Files with
Bram Moolenaar543b7ef2013-06-01 14:50:56 +02001431the following extensions are recognized as Erlang files: erl, hrl, yaws.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001432
Bram Moolenaarad3b3662013-05-17 18:14:19 +02001433The BIFs (built-in functions) are highlighted by default. To disable this,
1434put the following line in your vimrc: >
1435
1436 :let g:erlang_highlight_bifs = 0
1437
1438To enable highlighting some special atoms, put this in your vimrc: >
1439
1440 :let g:erlang_highlight_special_atoms = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001441
1442
Bram Moolenaard68071d2006-05-02 22:08:30 +00001443FLEXWIKI *flexwiki.vim* *ft-flexwiki-syntax*
1444
1445FlexWiki is an ASP.NET-based wiki package available at http://www.flexwiki.com
Bram Moolenaar446beb42011-05-10 17:18:44 +02001446NOTE: this site currently doesn't work, on Wikipedia is mentioned that
1447development stopped in 2009.
Bram Moolenaard68071d2006-05-02 22:08:30 +00001448
1449Syntax highlighting is available for the most common elements of FlexWiki
1450syntax. The associated ftplugin script sets some buffer-local options to make
1451editing FlexWiki pages more convenient. FlexWiki considers a newline as the
1452start of a new paragraph, so the ftplugin sets 'tw'=0 (unlimited line length),
1453'wrap' (wrap long lines instead of using horizontal scrolling), 'linebreak'
1454(to wrap at a character in 'breakat' instead of at the last char on screen),
1455and so on. It also includes some keymaps that are disabled by default.
1456
1457If you want to enable the keymaps that make "j" and "k" and the cursor keys
1458move up and down by display lines, add this to your .vimrc: >
1459 :let flexwiki_maps = 1
1460
1461
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001462FORM *form.vim* *ft-form-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001463
1464The coloring scheme for syntax elements in the FORM file uses the default
1465modes Conditional, Number, Statement, Comment, PreProc, Type, and String,
Bram Moolenaardd2a0d82007-05-12 15:07:00 +00001466following the language specifications in 'Symbolic Manipulation with FORM' by
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001467J.A.M. Vermaseren, CAN, Netherlands, 1991.
1468
1469If you want include your own changes to the default colors, you have to
1470redefine the following syntax groups:
1471
1472 - formConditional
1473 - formNumber
1474 - formStatement
1475 - formHeaderStatement
1476 - formComment
1477 - formPreProc
1478 - formDirective
1479 - formType
1480 - formString
1481
1482Note that the form.vim syntax file implements FORM preprocessor commands and
1483directives per default in the same syntax group.
1484
1485A predefined enhanced color mode for FORM is available to distinguish between
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001486header statements and statements in the body of a FORM program. To activate
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001487this mode define the following variable in your vimrc file >
1488
1489 :let form_enhanced_color=1
1490
1491The enhanced mode also takes advantage of additional color features for a dark
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001492gvim display. Here, statements are colored LightYellow instead of Yellow, and
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001493conditionals are LightBlue for better distinction.
1494
1495
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001496FORTRAN *fortran.vim* *ft-fortran-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001497
1498Default highlighting and dialect ~
Bram Moolenaar6ee8d892012-01-10 14:55:01 +01001499Highlighting appropriate for Fortran 2008 is used by default. This choice
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02001500should be appropriate for most users most of the time because Fortran 2008 is
1501almost a superset of previous versions (Fortran 2003, 95, 90, and 77).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001502
1503Fortran source code form ~
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001504Fortran code can be in either fixed or free source form. Note that the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001505syntax highlighting will not be correct if the form is incorrectly set.
1506
1507When you create a new fortran file, the syntax script assumes fixed source
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001508form. If you always use free source form, then >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001509 :let fortran_free_source=1
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001510in your .vimrc prior to the :syntax on command. If you always use fixed source
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001511form, then >
1512 :let fortran_fixed_source=1
1513in your .vimrc prior to the :syntax on command.
1514
Bram Moolenaar256972a2015-12-29 19:10:25 +01001515If the form of the source code depends, in a non-standard way, upon the file
1516extension, then it is most convenient to set fortran_free_source in a ftplugin
1517file. For more information on ftplugin files, see |ftplugin|. Note that this
1518will work only if the "filetype plugin indent on" command precedes the "syntax
1519on" command in your .vimrc file.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001520
1521When you edit an existing fortran file, the syntax script will assume free
1522source form if the fortran_free_source variable has been set, and assumes
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001523fixed source form if the fortran_fixed_source variable has been set. If
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001524neither of these variables have been set, the syntax script attempts to
Bram Moolenaar256972a2015-12-29 19:10:25 +01001525determine which source form has been used by examining the file extension
1526using conventions common to the ifort, gfortran, Cray, NAG, and PathScale
1527compilers (.f, .for, .f77 for fixed-source, .f90, .f95, .f03, .f08 for
1528free-source). If none of this works, then the script examines the first five
1529columns of the first 500 lines of your file. If no signs of free source form
1530are detected, then the file is assumed to be in fixed source form. The
1531algorithm should work in the vast majority of cases. In some cases, such as a
1532file that begins with 500 or more full-line comments, the script may
1533incorrectly decide that the fortran code is in fixed form. If that happens,
1534just add a non-comment statement beginning anywhere in the first five columns
Bram Moolenaar3df01732017-02-17 22:47:16 +01001535of the first twenty-five lines, save (:w) and then reload (:e!) the file.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001536
1537Tabs in fortran files ~
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001538Tabs are not recognized by the Fortran standards. Tabs are not a good idea in
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001539fixed format fortran source code which requires fixed column boundaries.
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001540Therefore, tabs are marked as errors. Nevertheless, some programmers like
1541using tabs. If your fortran files contain tabs, then you should set the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001542variable fortran_have_tabs in your .vimrc with a command such as >
1543 :let fortran_have_tabs=1
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001544placed prior to the :syntax on command. Unfortunately, the use of tabs will
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001545mean that the syntax file will not be able to detect incorrect margins.
1546
1547Syntax folding of fortran files ~
1548If you wish to use foldmethod=syntax, then you must first set the variable
1549fortran_fold with a command such as >
1550 :let fortran_fold=1
1551to instruct the syntax script to define fold regions for program units, that
1552is main programs starting with a program statement, subroutines, function
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001553subprograms, block data subprograms, interface blocks, and modules. If you
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001554also set the variable fortran_fold_conditionals with a command such as >
1555 :let fortran_fold_conditionals=1
1556then fold regions will also be defined for do loops, if blocks, and select
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001557case constructs. If you also set the variable
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001558fortran_fold_multilinecomments with a command such as >
1559 :let fortran_fold_multilinecomments=1
1560then fold regions will also be defined for three or more consecutive comment
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001561lines. Note that defining fold regions can be slow for large files.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001562
1563If fortran_fold, and possibly fortran_fold_conditionals and/or
1564fortran_fold_multilinecomments, have been set, then vim will fold your file if
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001565you set foldmethod=syntax. Comments or blank lines placed between two program
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001566units are not folded because they are seen as not belonging to any program
1567unit.
1568
1569More precise fortran syntax ~
1570If you set the variable fortran_more_precise with a command such as >
1571 :let fortran_more_precise=1
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001572then the syntax coloring will be more precise but slower. In particular,
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001573statement labels used in do, goto and arithmetic if statements will be
1574recognized, as will construct names at the end of a do, if, select or forall
1575construct.
1576
1577Non-default fortran dialects ~
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001578The syntax script supports two Fortran dialects: f08 and F. You will probably
1579find the default highlighting (f08) satisfactory. A few legacy constructs
1580deleted or declared obsolescent in the 2008 standard are highlighted as todo
1581items.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001582
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001583If you use F, the advantage of setting the dialect appropriately is that
1584other legacy features excluded from F will be highlighted as todo items and
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02001585that free source form will be assumed.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001586
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001587The dialect can be selected in various ways. If all your fortran files use
1588the same dialect, set the global variable fortran_dialect in your .vimrc prior
1589to your syntax on statement. The case-sensitive, permissible values of
1590fortran_dialect are "f08" or "F". Invalid values of fortran_dialect are
1591ignored.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001592
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001593If the dialect depends upon the file extension, then it is most convenient to
1594set a buffer-local variable in a ftplugin file. For more information on
1595ftplugin files, see |ftplugin|. For example, if all your fortran files with
1596an .f90 extension are written in the F subset, your ftplugin file should
1597contain the code >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001598 let s:extfname = expand("%:e")
1599 if s:extfname ==? "f90"
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001600 let b:fortran_dialect="F"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001601 else
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001602 unlet! b:fortran_dialect
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001603 endif
1604Note that this will work only if the "filetype plugin indent on" command
1605precedes the "syntax on" command in your .vimrc file.
1606
1607Finer control is necessary if the file extension does not uniquely identify
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001608the dialect. You can override the default dialect, on a file-by-file basis,
1609by including a comment with the directive "fortran_dialect=xx" (where xx=F or
1610f08) in one of the first three lines in your file. For example, your older .f
1611files may be legacy code but your newer ones may be F codes, and you would
1612identify the latter by including in the first three lines of those files a
1613Fortran comment of the form >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001614 ! fortran_dialect=F
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001615
1616For previous versions of the syntax, you may have set fortran_dialect to the
1617now-obsolete values "f77", "f90", "f95", or "elf". Such settings will be
1618silently handled as "f08". Users of "elf" may wish to experiment with "F"
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02001619instead.
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001620
1621The syntax/fortran.vim script contains embedded comments that tell you how to
1622comment and/or uncomment some lines to (a) activate recognition of some
1623non-standard, vendor-supplied intrinsics and (b) to prevent features deleted
1624or declared obsolescent in the 2008 standard from being highlighted as todo
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02001625items.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001626
1627Limitations ~
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001628Parenthesis checking does not catch too few closing parentheses. Hollerith
1629strings are not recognized. Some keywords may be highlighted incorrectly
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001630because Fortran90 has no reserved words.
1631
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001632For further information related to fortran, see |ft-fortran-indent| and
1633|ft-fortran-plugin|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001634
1635
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001636FVWM CONFIGURATION FILES *fvwm.vim* *ft-fvwm-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001637
1638In order for Vim to recognize Fvwm configuration files that do not match
1639the patterns *fvwmrc* or *fvwm2rc* , you must put additional patterns
1640appropriate to your system in your myfiletypes.vim file. For these
1641patterns, you must set the variable "b:fvwm_version" to the major version
1642number of Fvwm, and the 'filetype' option to fvwm.
1643
1644For example, to make Vim identify all files in /etc/X11/fvwm2/
1645as Fvwm2 configuration files, add the following: >
1646
1647 :au! BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/X11/fvwm2/* let b:fvwm_version = 2 |
1648 \ set filetype=fvwm
1649
1650If you'd like Vim to highlight all valid color names, tell it where to
1651find the color database (rgb.txt) on your system. Do this by setting
1652"rgb_file" to its location. Assuming your color database is located
1653in /usr/X11/lib/X11/, you should add the line >
1654
1655 :let rgb_file = "/usr/X11/lib/X11/rgb.txt"
1656
1657to your .vimrc file.
1658
1659
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001660GSP *gsp.vim* *ft-gsp-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001661
1662The default coloring style for GSP pages is defined by |html.vim|, and
1663the coloring for java code (within java tags or inline between backticks)
1664is defined by |java.vim|. The following HTML groups defined in |html.vim|
1665are redefined to incorporate and highlight inline java code:
1666
1667 htmlString
1668 htmlValue
1669 htmlEndTag
1670 htmlTag
1671 htmlTagN
1672
1673Highlighting should look fine most of the places where you'd see inline
1674java code, but in some special cases it may not. To add another HTML
1675group where you will have inline java code where it does not highlight
1676correctly, just copy the line you want from |html.vim| and add gspJava
1677to the contains clause.
1678
1679The backticks for inline java are highlighted according to the htmlError
1680group to make them easier to see.
1681
1682
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001683GROFF *groff.vim* *ft-groff-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001684
1685The groff syntax file is a wrapper for |nroff.vim|, see the notes
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001686under that heading for examples of use and configuration. The purpose
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001687of this wrapper is to set up groff syntax extensions by setting the
1688filetype from a |modeline| or in a personal filetype definitions file
1689(see |filetype.txt|).
1690
1691
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001692HASKELL *haskell.vim* *lhaskell.vim* *ft-haskell-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001693
1694The Haskell syntax files support plain Haskell code as well as literate
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001695Haskell code, the latter in both Bird style and TeX style. The Haskell
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001696syntax highlighting will also highlight C preprocessor directives.
1697
1698If you want to highlight delimiter characters (useful if you have a
1699light-coloured background), add to your .vimrc: >
1700 :let hs_highlight_delimiters = 1
1701To treat True and False as keywords as opposed to ordinary identifiers,
1702add: >
1703 :let hs_highlight_boolean = 1
1704To also treat the names of primitive types as keywords: >
1705 :let hs_highlight_types = 1
1706And to treat the names of even more relatively common types as keywords: >
1707 :let hs_highlight_more_types = 1
1708If you want to highlight the names of debugging functions, put in
1709your .vimrc: >
1710 :let hs_highlight_debug = 1
1711
1712The Haskell syntax highlighting also highlights C preprocessor
1713directives, and flags lines that start with # but are not valid
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001714directives as erroneous. This interferes with Haskell's syntax for
1715operators, as they may start with #. If you want to highlight those
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001716as operators as opposed to errors, put in your .vimrc: >
1717 :let hs_allow_hash_operator = 1
1718
1719The syntax highlighting for literate Haskell code will try to
1720automatically guess whether your literate Haskell code contains
1721TeX markup or not, and correspondingly highlight TeX constructs
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001722or nothing at all. You can override this globally by putting
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001723in your .vimrc >
1724 :let lhs_markup = none
1725for no highlighting at all, or >
1726 :let lhs_markup = tex
1727to force the highlighting to always try to highlight TeX markup.
1728For more flexibility, you may also use buffer local versions of
1729this variable, so e.g. >
1730 :let b:lhs_markup = tex
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001731will force TeX highlighting for a particular buffer. It has to be
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001732set before turning syntax highlighting on for the buffer or
1733loading a file.
1734
1735
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001736HTML *html.vim* *ft-html-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001737
1738The coloring scheme for tags in the HTML file works as follows.
1739
1740The <> of opening tags are colored differently than the </> of a closing tag.
1741This is on purpose! For opening tags the 'Function' color is used, while for
1742closing tags the 'Type' color is used (See syntax.vim to check how those are
1743defined for you)
1744
1745Known tag names are colored the same way as statements in C. Unknown tag
1746names are colored with the same color as the <> or </> respectively which
1747makes it easy to spot errors
1748
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001749Note that the same is true for argument (or attribute) names. Known attribute
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001750names are colored differently than unknown ones.
1751
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001752Some HTML tags are used to change the rendering of text. The following tags
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001753are recognized by the html.vim syntax coloring file and change the way normal
1754text is shown: <B> <I> <U> <EM> <STRONG> (<EM> is used as an alias for <I>,
1755while <STRONG> as an alias for <B>), <H1> - <H6>, <HEAD>, <TITLE> and <A>, but
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001756only if used as a link (that is, it must include a href as in
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00001757<A href="somefile.html">).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001758
1759If you want to change how such text is rendered, you must redefine the
1760following syntax groups:
1761
1762 - htmlBold
1763 - htmlBoldUnderline
1764 - htmlBoldUnderlineItalic
1765 - htmlUnderline
1766 - htmlUnderlineItalic
1767 - htmlItalic
1768 - htmlTitle for titles
1769 - htmlH1 - htmlH6 for headings
1770
1771To make this redefinition work you must redefine them all with the exception
1772of the last two (htmlTitle and htmlH[1-6], which are optional) and define the
1773following variable in your vimrc (this is due to the order in which the files
1774are read during initialization) >
1775 :let html_my_rendering=1
1776
1777If you'd like to see an example download mysyntax.vim at
1778http://www.fleiner.com/vim/download.html
1779
1780You can also disable this rendering by adding the following line to your
1781vimrc file: >
1782 :let html_no_rendering=1
1783
1784HTML comments are rather special (see an HTML reference document for the
1785details), and the syntax coloring scheme will highlight all errors.
1786However, if you prefer to use the wrong style (starts with <!-- and
Bram Moolenaar8bb1c3e2014-07-04 16:43:17 +02001787ends with -->) you can define >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001788 :let html_wrong_comments=1
1789
1790JavaScript and Visual Basic embedded inside HTML documents are highlighted as
1791'Special' with statements, comments, strings and so on colored as in standard
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001792programming languages. Note that only JavaScript and Visual Basic are currently
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001793supported, no other scripting language has been added yet.
1794
1795Embedded and inlined cascading style sheets (CSS) are highlighted too.
1796
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001797There are several html preprocessor languages out there. html.vim has been
1798written such that it should be trivial to include it. To do so add the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001799following two lines to the syntax coloring file for that language
1800(the example comes from the asp.vim file):
Bram Moolenaar30e9b3c2019-09-07 16:24:12 +02001801>
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001802 runtime! syntax/html.vim
1803 syn cluster htmlPreproc add=asp
1804
1805Now you just need to make sure that you add all regions that contain
1806the preprocessor language to the cluster htmlPreproc.
1807
1808
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001809HTML/OS (by Aestiva) *htmlos.vim* *ft-htmlos-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001810
1811The coloring scheme for HTML/OS works as follows:
1812
1813Functions and variable names are the same color by default, because VIM
1814doesn't specify different colors for Functions and Identifiers. To change
1815this (which is recommended if you want function names to be recognizable in a
1816different color) you need to add the following line to either your ~/.vimrc: >
1817 :hi Function term=underline cterm=bold ctermfg=LightGray
1818
1819Of course, the ctermfg can be a different color if you choose.
1820
1821Another issues that HTML/OS runs into is that there is no special filetype to
1822signify that it is a file with HTML/OS coding. You can change this by opening
1823a file and turning on HTML/OS syntax by doing the following: >
1824 :set syntax=htmlos
1825
1826Lastly, it should be noted that the opening and closing characters to begin a
1827block of HTML/OS code can either be << or [[ and >> or ]], respectively.
1828
1829
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001830IA64 *ia64.vim* *intel-itanium* *ft-ia64-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001831
1832Highlighting for the Intel Itanium 64 assembly language. See |asm.vim| for
1833how to recognize this filetype.
1834
1835To have *.inc files be recognized as IA64, add this to your .vimrc file: >
1836 :let g:filetype_inc = "ia64"
1837
1838
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001839INFORM *inform.vim* *ft-inform-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001840
1841Inform highlighting includes symbols provided by the Inform Library, as
1842most programs make extensive use of it. If do not wish Library symbols
1843to be highlighted add this to your vim startup: >
1844 :let inform_highlight_simple=1
1845
1846By default it is assumed that Inform programs are Z-machine targeted,
1847and highlights Z-machine assembly language symbols appropriately. If
1848you intend your program to be targeted to a Glulx/Glk environment you
1849need to add this to your startup sequence: >
1850 :let inform_highlight_glulx=1
1851
1852This will highlight Glulx opcodes instead, and also adds glk() to the
1853set of highlighted system functions.
1854
1855The Inform compiler will flag certain obsolete keywords as errors when
1856it encounters them. These keywords are normally highlighted as errors
1857by Vim. To prevent such error highlighting, you must add this to your
1858startup sequence: >
1859 :let inform_suppress_obsolete=1
1860
1861By default, the language features highlighted conform to Compiler
1862version 6.30 and Library version 6.11. If you are using an older
1863Inform development environment, you may with to add this to your
1864startup sequence: >
1865 :let inform_highlight_old=1
1866
Bram Moolenaar9e54a0e2006-04-14 20:42:25 +00001867IDL *idl.vim* *idl-syntax*
1868
1869IDL (Interface Definition Language) files are used to define RPC calls. In
1870Microsoft land, this is also used for defining COM interfaces and calls.
1871
1872IDL's structure is simple enough to permit a full grammar based approach to
1873rather than using a few heuristics. The result is large and somewhat
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00001874repetitive but seems to work.
Bram Moolenaar9e54a0e2006-04-14 20:42:25 +00001875
1876There are some Microsoft extensions to idl files that are here. Some of them
1877are disabled by defining idl_no_ms_extensions.
1878
1879The more complex of the extensions are disabled by defining idl_no_extensions.
1880
1881Variable Effect ~
1882
1883idl_no_ms_extensions Disable some of the Microsoft specific
1884 extensions
1885idl_no_extensions Disable complex extensions
1886idlsyntax_showerror Show IDL errors (can be rather intrusive, but
1887 quite helpful)
1888idlsyntax_showerror_soft Use softer colours by default for errors
1889
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001890
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001891JAVA *java.vim* *ft-java-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001892
1893The java.vim syntax highlighting file offers several options:
1894
1895In Java 1.0.2 it was never possible to have braces inside parens, so this was
1896flagged as an error. Since Java 1.1 this is possible (with anonymous
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001897classes), and therefore is no longer marked as an error. If you prefer the old
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001898way, put the following line into your vim startup file: >
1899 :let java_mark_braces_in_parens_as_errors=1
1900
1901All identifiers in java.lang.* are always visible in all classes. To
1902highlight them use: >
1903 :let java_highlight_java_lang_ids=1
1904
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001905You can also highlight identifiers of most standard Java packages if you
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001906download the javaid.vim script at http://www.fleiner.com/vim/download.html.
1907If you prefer to only highlight identifiers of a certain package, say java.io
1908use the following: >
1909 :let java_highlight_java_io=1
1910Check the javaid.vim file for a list of all the packages that are supported.
1911
1912Function names are not highlighted, as the way to find functions depends on
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001913how you write Java code. The syntax file knows two possible ways to highlight
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001914functions:
1915
1916If you write function declarations that are always indented by either
1917a tab, 8 spaces or 2 spaces you may want to set >
1918 :let java_highlight_functions="indent"
1919However, if you follow the Java guidelines about how functions and classes are
1920supposed to be named (with respect to upper and lowercase), use >
1921 :let java_highlight_functions="style"
1922If both options do not work for you, but you would still want function
1923declarations to be highlighted create your own definitions by changing the
1924definitions in java.vim or by creating your own java.vim which includes the
1925original one and then adds the code to highlight functions.
1926
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001927In Java 1.1 the functions System.out.println() and System.err.println() should
Bram Moolenaared203462004-06-16 11:19:22 +00001928only be used for debugging. Therefore it is possible to highlight debugging
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001929statements differently. To do this you must add the following definition in
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001930your startup file: >
1931 :let java_highlight_debug=1
1932The result will be that those statements are highlighted as 'Special'
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001933characters. If you prefer to have them highlighted differently you must define
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001934new highlightings for the following groups.:
1935 Debug, DebugSpecial, DebugString, DebugBoolean, DebugType
1936which are used for the statement itself, special characters used in debug
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001937strings, strings, boolean constants and types (this, super) respectively. I
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001938have opted to chose another background for those statements.
1939
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001940Javadoc is a program that takes special comments out of Java program files and
1941creates HTML pages. The standard configuration will highlight this HTML code
1942similarly to HTML files (see |html.vim|). You can even add Javascript
1943and CSS inside this code (see below). There are four differences however:
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001944 1. The title (all characters up to the first '.' which is followed by
1945 some white space or up to the first '@') is colored differently (to change
1946 the color change the group CommentTitle).
1947 2. The text is colored as 'Comment'.
1948 3. HTML comments are colored as 'Special'
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001949 4. The special Javadoc tags (@see, @param, ...) are highlighted as specials
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001950 and the argument (for @see, @param, @exception) as Function.
1951To turn this feature off add the following line to your startup file: >
1952 :let java_ignore_javadoc=1
1953
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001954If you use the special Javadoc comment highlighting described above you
1955can also turn on special highlighting for Javascript, visual basic
1956scripts and embedded CSS (stylesheets). This makes only sense if you
1957actually have Javadoc comments that include either Javascript or embedded
1958CSS. The options to use are >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001959 :let java_javascript=1
1960 :let java_css=1
1961 :let java_vb=1
1962
1963In order to highlight nested parens with different colors define colors
1964for javaParen, javaParen1 and javaParen2, for example with >
1965 :hi link javaParen Comment
1966or >
1967 :hi javaParen ctermfg=blue guifg=#0000ff
1968
1969If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed
1970when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "java_minlines" internal variable
1971to a larger number: >
1972 :let java_minlines = 50
1973This will make the syntax synchronization start 50 lines before the first
1974displayed line. The default value is 10. The disadvantage of using a larger
1975number is that redrawing can become slow.
1976
1977
Bram Moolenaar589edb32019-09-20 14:38:13 +02001978JSON *json.vim* *ft-json-syntax*
1979
1980The json syntax file provides syntax highlighting with conceal support by
1981default. To disable concealment: >
1982 let g:vim_json_conceal = 0
1983
1984To disable syntax highlighting of errors: >
1985 let g:vim_json_warnings = 0
1986
1987
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001988LACE *lace.vim* *ft-lace-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001989
1990Lace (Language for Assembly of Classes in Eiffel) is case insensitive, but the
1991style guide lines are not. If you prefer case insensitive highlighting, just
1992define the vim variable 'lace_case_insensitive' in your startup file: >
1993 :let lace_case_insensitive=1
1994
1995
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001996LEX *lex.vim* *ft-lex-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001997
1998Lex uses brute-force synchronizing as the "^%%$" section delimiter
1999gives no clue as to what section follows. Consequently, the value for >
2000 :syn sync minlines=300
2001may be changed by the user if s/he is experiencing synchronization
2002difficulties (such as may happen with large lex files).
2003
2004
Bram Moolenaar6fc45b52010-07-25 17:42:45 +02002005LIFELINES *lifelines.vim* *ft-lifelines-syntax*
2006
2007To highlight deprecated functions as errors, add in your .vimrc: >
2008
2009 :let g:lifelines_deprecated = 1
2010<
2011
Bram Moolenaara5fac542005-10-12 20:58:49 +00002012LISP *lisp.vim* *ft-lisp-syntax*
2013
2014The lisp syntax highlighting provides two options: >
2015
2016 g:lisp_instring : if it exists, then "(...)" strings are highlighted
2017 as if the contents of the string were lisp.
2018 Useful for AutoLisp.
2019 g:lisp_rainbow : if it exists and is nonzero, then differing levels
2020 of parenthesization will receive different
2021 highlighting.
2022<
2023The g:lisp_rainbow option provides 10 levels of individual colorization for
2024the parentheses and backquoted parentheses. Because of the quantity of
2025colorization levels, unlike non-rainbow highlighting, the rainbow mode
2026specifies its highlighting using ctermfg and guifg, thereby bypassing the
Bram Moolenaar723dd942019-04-04 13:11:03 +02002027usual color scheme control using standard highlighting groups. The actual
Bram Moolenaara5fac542005-10-12 20:58:49 +00002028highlighting used depends on the dark/bright setting (see |'bg'|).
2029
2030
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002031LITE *lite.vim* *ft-lite-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002032
2033There are two options for the lite syntax highlighting.
2034
2035If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings, use this: >
2036
2037 :let lite_sql_query = 1
2038
2039For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can
2040set "lite_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: >
2041
2042 :let lite_minlines = 200
2043
2044
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002045LPC *lpc.vim* *ft-lpc-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002046
Bram Moolenaard2f3a8b2018-06-19 14:35:59 +02002047LPC stands for a simple, memory-efficient language: Lars Pensjö C. The
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002048file name of LPC is usually *.c. Recognizing these files as LPC would bother
2049users writing only C programs. If you want to use LPC syntax in Vim, you
2050should set a variable in your .vimrc file: >
2051
2052 :let lpc_syntax_for_c = 1
2053
2054If it doesn't work properly for some particular C or LPC files, use a
2055modeline. For a LPC file:
2056
2057 // vim:set ft=lpc:
2058
2059For a C file that is recognized as LPC:
2060
2061 // vim:set ft=c:
2062
2063If you don't want to set the variable, use the modeline in EVERY LPC file.
2064
2065There are several implementations for LPC, we intend to support most widely
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002066used ones. Here the default LPC syntax is for MudOS series, for MudOS v22
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002067and before, you should turn off the sensible modifiers, and this will also
Bram Moolenaar7e38ea22014-04-05 22:55:53 +02002068assert the new efuns after v22 to be invalid, don't set this variable when
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002069you are using the latest version of MudOS: >
2070
2071 :let lpc_pre_v22 = 1
2072
2073For LpMud 3.2 series of LPC: >
2074
2075 :let lpc_compat_32 = 1
2076
2077For LPC4 series of LPC: >
2078
2079 :let lpc_use_lpc4_syntax = 1
2080
2081For uLPC series of LPC:
2082uLPC has been developed to Pike, so you should use Pike syntax
2083instead, and the name of your source file should be *.pike
2084
2085
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002086LUA *lua.vim* *ft-lua-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002087
Bram Moolenaar5dc62522012-02-13 00:05:22 +01002088The Lua syntax file can be used for versions 4.0, 5.0, 5.1 and 5.2 (5.2 is
Bram Moolenaarfc1421e2006-04-20 22:17:20 +00002089the default). You can select one of these versions using the global variables
2090lua_version and lua_subversion. For example, to activate Lua
Bram Moolenaar5dc62522012-02-13 00:05:22 +010020915.1 syntax highlighting, set the variables like this:
Bram Moolenaarfc1421e2006-04-20 22:17:20 +00002092
2093 :let lua_version = 5
2094 :let lua_subversion = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002095
2096
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002097MAIL *mail.vim* *ft-mail.vim*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002098
2099Vim highlights all the standard elements of an email (headers, signatures,
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002100quoted text and URLs / email addresses). In keeping with standard conventions,
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002101signatures begin in a line containing only "--" followed optionally by
2102whitespaces and end with a newline.
2103
2104Vim treats lines beginning with ']', '}', '|', '>' or a word followed by '>'
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002105as quoted text. However Vim highlights headers and signatures in quoted text
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002106only if the text is quoted with '>' (optionally followed by one space).
2107
2108By default mail.vim synchronises syntax to 100 lines before the first
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002109displayed line. If you have a slow machine, and generally deal with emails
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002110with short headers, you can change this to a smaller value: >
2111
2112 :let mail_minlines = 30
2113
2114
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002115MAKE *make.vim* *ft-make-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002116
2117In makefiles, commands are usually highlighted to make it easy for you to spot
2118errors. However, this may be too much coloring for you. You can turn this
2119feature off by using: >
2120
2121 :let make_no_commands = 1
2122
2123
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002124MAPLE *maple.vim* *ft-maple-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002125
2126Maple V, by Waterloo Maple Inc, supports symbolic algebra. The language
2127supports many packages of functions which are selectively loaded by the user.
2128The standard set of packages' functions as supplied in Maple V release 4 may be
2129highlighted at the user's discretion. Users may place in their .vimrc file: >
2130
2131 :let mvpkg_all= 1
2132
2133to get all package functions highlighted, or users may select any subset by
2134choosing a variable/package from the table below and setting that variable to
21351, also in their .vimrc file (prior to sourcing
2136$VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim).
2137
2138 Table of Maple V Package Function Selectors >
2139 mv_DEtools mv_genfunc mv_networks mv_process
2140 mv_Galois mv_geometry mv_numapprox mv_simplex
2141 mv_GaussInt mv_grobner mv_numtheory mv_stats
2142 mv_LREtools mv_group mv_orthopoly mv_student
2143 mv_combinat mv_inttrans mv_padic mv_sumtools
2144 mv_combstruct mv_liesymm mv_plots mv_tensor
2145 mv_difforms mv_linalg mv_plottools mv_totorder
2146 mv_finance mv_logic mv_powseries
2147
2148
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002149MATHEMATICA *mma.vim* *ft-mma-syntax* *ft-mathematica-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar34cdc3e2005-05-18 22:24:46 +00002150
2151Empty *.m files will automatically be presumed to be Matlab files unless you
2152have the following in your .vimrc: >
2153
2154 let filetype_m = "mma"
2155
2156
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002157MOO *moo.vim* *ft-moo-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002158
2159If you use C-style comments inside expressions and find it mangles your
2160highlighting, you may want to use extended (slow!) matches for C-style
2161comments: >
2162
2163 :let moo_extended_cstyle_comments = 1
2164
2165To disable highlighting of pronoun substitution patterns inside strings: >
2166
2167 :let moo_no_pronoun_sub = 1
2168
2169To disable highlighting of the regular expression operator '%|', and matching
2170'%(' and '%)' inside strings: >
2171
2172 :let moo_no_regexp = 1
2173
2174Unmatched double quotes can be recognized and highlighted as errors: >
2175
2176 :let moo_unmatched_quotes = 1
2177
2178To highlight builtin properties (.name, .location, .programmer etc.): >
2179
2180 :let moo_builtin_properties = 1
2181
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002182Unknown builtin functions can be recognized and highlighted as errors. If you
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002183use this option, add your own extensions to the mooKnownBuiltinFunction group.
2184To enable this option: >
2185
2186 :let moo_unknown_builtin_functions = 1
2187
2188An example of adding sprintf() to the list of known builtin functions: >
2189
2190 :syn keyword mooKnownBuiltinFunction sprintf contained
2191
2192
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002193MSQL *msql.vim* *ft-msql-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002194
2195There are two options for the msql syntax highlighting.
2196
2197If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings, use this: >
2198
2199 :let msql_sql_query = 1
2200
2201For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can
2202set "msql_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: >
2203
2204 :let msql_minlines = 200
2205
2206
Bram Moolenaarc572da52017-08-27 16:52:01 +02002207N1QL *n1ql.vim* *ft-n1ql-syntax*
2208
2209N1QL is a SQL-like declarative language for manipulating JSON documents in
2210Couchbase Server databases.
2211
2212Vim syntax highlights N1QL statements, keywords, operators, types, comments,
2213and special values. Vim ignores syntactical elements specific to SQL or its
2214many dialects, like COLUMN or CHAR, that don't exist in N1QL.
2215
2216
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002217NCF *ncf.vim* *ft-ncf-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002218
2219There is one option for NCF syntax highlighting.
2220
2221If you want to have unrecognized (by ncf.vim) statements highlighted as
2222errors, use this: >
2223
2224 :let ncf_highlight_unknowns = 1
2225
2226If you don't want to highlight these errors, leave it unset.
2227
2228
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002229NROFF *nroff.vim* *ft-nroff-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002230
2231The nroff syntax file works with AT&T n/troff out of the box. You need to
2232activate the GNU groff extra features included in the syntax file before you
2233can use them.
2234
2235For example, Linux and BSD distributions use groff as their default text
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002236processing package. In order to activate the extra syntax highlighting
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002237features for groff, add the following option to your start-up files: >
2238
2239 :let b:nroff_is_groff = 1
2240
2241Groff is different from the old AT&T n/troff that you may still find in
2242Solaris. Groff macro and request names can be longer than 2 characters and
2243there are extensions to the language primitives. For example, in AT&T troff
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002244you access the year as a 2-digit number with the request \(yr. In groff you
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002245can use the same request, recognized for compatibility, or you can use groff's
2246native syntax, \[yr]. Furthermore, you can use a 4-digit year directly:
2247\[year]. Macro requests can be longer than 2 characters, for example, GNU mm
2248accepts the requests ".VERBON" and ".VERBOFF" for creating verbatim
2249environments.
2250
2251In order to obtain the best formatted output g/troff can give you, you should
2252follow a few simple rules about spacing and punctuation.
2253
22541. Do not leave empty spaces at the end of lines.
2255
22562. Leave one space and one space only after an end-of-sentence period,
2257 exclamation mark, etc.
2258
22593. For reasons stated below, it is best to follow all period marks with a
2260 carriage return.
2261
2262The reason behind these unusual tips is that g/n/troff have a line breaking
2263algorithm that can be easily upset if you don't follow the rules given above.
2264
2265Unlike TeX, troff fills text line-by-line, not paragraph-by-paragraph and,
2266furthermore, it does not have a concept of glue or stretch, all horizontal and
2267vertical space input will be output as is.
2268
2269Therefore, you should be careful about not using more space between sentences
2270than you intend to have in your final document. For this reason, the common
2271practice is to insert a carriage return immediately after all punctuation
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002272marks. If you want to have "even" text in your final processed output, you
Bram Moolenaarbf884932013-04-05 22:26:15 +02002273need to maintain regular spacing in the input text. To mark both trailing
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002274spaces and two or more spaces after a punctuation as an error, use: >
2275
2276 :let nroff_space_errors = 1
2277
2278Another technique to detect extra spacing and other errors that will interfere
2279with the correct typesetting of your file, is to define an eye-catching
2280highlighting definition for the syntax groups "nroffDefinition" and
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002281"nroffDefSpecial" in your configuration files. For example: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002282
2283 hi def nroffDefinition term=italic cterm=italic gui=reverse
2284 hi def nroffDefSpecial term=italic,bold cterm=italic,bold
2285 \ gui=reverse,bold
2286
2287If you want to navigate preprocessor entries in your source file as easily as
2288with section markers, you can activate the following option in your .vimrc
2289file: >
2290
2291 let b:preprocs_as_sections = 1
2292
Bram Moolenaar69a7cb42004-06-20 12:51:53 +00002293As well, the syntax file adds an extra paragraph marker for the extended
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002294paragraph macro (.XP) in the ms package.
2295
2296Finally, there is a |groff.vim| syntax file that can be used for enabling
2297groff syntax highlighting either on a file basis or globally by default.
2298
2299
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002300OCAML *ocaml.vim* *ft-ocaml-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002301
2302The OCaml syntax file handles files having the following prefixes: .ml,
2303.mli, .mll and .mly. By setting the following variable >
2304
2305 :let ocaml_revised = 1
2306
2307you can switch from standard OCaml-syntax to revised syntax as supported
2308by the camlp4 preprocessor. Setting the variable >
2309
2310 :let ocaml_noend_error = 1
2311
2312prevents highlighting of "end" as error, which is useful when sources
2313contain very long structures that Vim does not synchronize anymore.
2314
2315
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002316PAPP *papp.vim* *ft-papp-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002317
2318The PApp syntax file handles .papp files and, to a lesser extend, .pxml
2319and .pxsl files which are all a mixture of perl/xml/html/other using xml
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002320as the top-level file format. By default everything inside phtml or pxml
2321sections is treated as a string with embedded preprocessor commands. If
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002322you set the variable: >
2323
2324 :let papp_include_html=1
2325
2326in your startup file it will try to syntax-hilight html code inside phtml
2327sections, but this is relatively slow and much too colourful to be able to
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002328edit sensibly. ;)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002329
2330The newest version of the papp.vim syntax file can usually be found at
2331http://papp.plan9.de.
2332
2333
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002334PASCAL *pascal.vim* *ft-pascal-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002335
2336Files matching "*.p" could be Progress or Pascal. If the automatic detection
2337doesn't work for you, or you don't edit Progress at all, use this in your
2338startup vimrc: >
2339
2340 :let filetype_p = "pascal"
2341
2342The Pascal syntax file has been extended to take into account some extensions
2343provided by Turbo Pascal, Free Pascal Compiler and GNU Pascal Compiler.
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002344Delphi keywords are also supported. By default, Turbo Pascal 7.0 features are
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002345enabled. If you prefer to stick with the standard Pascal keywords, add the
2346following line to your startup file: >
2347
2348 :let pascal_traditional=1
2349
2350To switch on Delphi specific constructions (such as one-line comments,
2351keywords, etc): >
2352
2353 :let pascal_delphi=1
2354
2355
2356The option pascal_symbol_operator controls whether symbol operators such as +,
2357*, .., etc. are displayed using the Operator color or not. To colorize symbol
2358operators, add the following line to your startup file: >
2359
2360 :let pascal_symbol_operator=1
2361
2362Some functions are highlighted by default. To switch it off: >
2363
2364 :let pascal_no_functions=1
2365
Bram Moolenaar996343d2010-07-04 22:20:21 +02002366Furthermore, there are specific variables for some compilers. Besides
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002367pascal_delphi, there are pascal_gpc and pascal_fpc. Default extensions try to
2368match Turbo Pascal. >
2369
2370 :let pascal_gpc=1
2371
2372or >
2373
2374 :let pascal_fpc=1
2375
2376To ensure that strings are defined on a single line, you can define the
2377pascal_one_line_string variable. >
2378
2379 :let pascal_one_line_string=1
2380
2381If you dislike <Tab> chars, you can set the pascal_no_tabs variable. Tabs
2382will be highlighted as Error. >
2383
2384 :let pascal_no_tabs=1
2385
2386
2387
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002388PERL *perl.vim* *ft-perl-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002389
2390There are a number of possible options to the perl syntax highlighting.
2391
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002392Inline POD highlighting is now turned on by default. If you don't wish
2393to have the added complexity of highlighting POD embedded within Perl
2394files, you may set the 'perl_include_pod' option to 0: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002395
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002396 :let perl_include_pod = 0
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002397
Bram Moolenaar822ff862014-06-12 21:46:14 +02002398To reduce the complexity of parsing (and increase performance) you can switch
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002399off two elements in the parsing of variable names and contents. >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002400
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002401To handle package references in variable and function names not differently
2402from the rest of the name (like 'PkgName::' in '$PkgName::VarName'): >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002403
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002404 :let perl_no_scope_in_variables = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002405
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002406(In Vim 6.x it was the other way around: "perl_want_scope_in_variables"
2407enabled it.)
2408
2409If you do not want complex things like '@{${"foo"}}' to be parsed: >
2410
2411 :let perl_no_extended_vars = 1
2412
Bram Moolenaar3fdfa4a2004-10-07 21:02:47 +00002413(In Vim 6.x it was the other way around: "perl_extended_vars" enabled it.)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002414
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002415The coloring strings can be changed. By default strings and qq friends will be
2416highlighted like the first line. If you set the variable
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002417perl_string_as_statement, it will be highlighted as in the second line.
2418
2419 "hello world!"; qq|hello world|;
2420 ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^NN^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^N (unlet perl_string_as_statement)
2421 S^^^^^^^^^^^^SNNSSS^^^^^^^^^^^SN (let perl_string_as_statement)
2422
2423(^ = perlString, S = perlStatement, N = None at all)
2424
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002425The syncing has 3 options. The first two switch off some triggering of
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002426synchronization and should only be needed in case it fails to work properly.
2427If while scrolling all of a sudden the whole screen changes color completely
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002428then you should try and switch off one of those. Let me know if you can figure
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002429out the line that causes the mistake.
2430
2431One triggers on "^\s*sub\s*" and the other on "^[$@%]" more or less. >
2432
2433 :let perl_no_sync_on_sub
2434 :let perl_no_sync_on_global_var
2435
2436Below you can set the maximum distance VIM should look for starting points for
2437its attempts in syntax highlighting. >
2438
2439 :let perl_sync_dist = 100
2440
2441If you want to use folding with perl, set perl_fold: >
2442
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002443 :let perl_fold = 1
2444
2445If you want to fold blocks in if statements, etc. as well set the following: >
2446
2447 :let perl_fold_blocks = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002448
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002449Subroutines are folded by default if 'perl_fold' is set. If you do not want
2450this, you can set 'perl_nofold_subs': >
Bram Moolenaar8ada17c2006-01-19 22:16:24 +00002451
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002452 :let perl_nofold_subs = 1
Bram Moolenaar8ada17c2006-01-19 22:16:24 +00002453
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002454Anonymous subroutines are not folded by default; you may enable their folding
2455via 'perl_fold_anonymous_subs': >
Bram Moolenaar8ada17c2006-01-19 22:16:24 +00002456
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002457 :let perl_fold_anonymous_subs = 1
2458
2459Packages are also folded by default if 'perl_fold' is set. To disable this
2460behavior, set 'perl_nofold_packages': >
2461
2462 :let perl_nofold_packages = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002463
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002464PHP3 and PHP4 *php.vim* *php3.vim* *ft-php-syntax* *ft-php3-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002465
2466[note: previously this was called "php3", but since it now also supports php4
2467it has been renamed to "php"]
2468
2469There are the following options for the php syntax highlighting.
2470
2471If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings: >
2472
2473 let php_sql_query = 1
2474
2475For highlighting the Baselib methods: >
2476
2477 let php_baselib = 1
2478
2479Enable HTML syntax highlighting inside strings: >
2480
2481 let php_htmlInStrings = 1
2482
2483Using the old colorstyle: >
2484
2485 let php_oldStyle = 1
2486
2487Enable highlighting ASP-style short tags: >
2488
2489 let php_asp_tags = 1
2490
2491Disable short tags: >
2492
2493 let php_noShortTags = 1
2494
2495For highlighting parent error ] or ): >
2496
2497 let php_parent_error_close = 1
2498
Bram Moolenaar543b7ef2013-06-01 14:50:56 +02002499For skipping a php end tag, if there exists an open ( or [ without a closing
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002500one: >
2501
2502 let php_parent_error_open = 1
2503
2504Enable folding for classes and functions: >
2505
2506 let php_folding = 1
2507
2508Selecting syncing method: >
2509
2510 let php_sync_method = x
2511
2512x = -1 to sync by search (default),
2513x > 0 to sync at least x lines backwards,
2514x = 0 to sync from start.
2515
2516
Bram Moolenaard2cec5b2006-03-28 21:08:56 +00002517PLAINTEX *plaintex.vim* *ft-plaintex-syntax*
2518
2519TeX is a typesetting language, and plaintex is the file type for the "plain"
2520variant of TeX. If you never want your *.tex files recognized as plain TeX,
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +00002521see |ft-tex-plugin|.
Bram Moolenaard2cec5b2006-03-28 21:08:56 +00002522
2523This syntax file has the option >
2524
2525 let g:plaintex_delimiters = 1
2526
2527if you want to highlight brackets "[]" and braces "{}".
2528
2529
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002530PPWIZARD *ppwiz.vim* *ft-ppwiz-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002531
2532PPWizard is a preprocessor for HTML and OS/2 INF files
2533
2534This syntax file has the options:
2535
2536- ppwiz_highlight_defs : determines highlighting mode for PPWizard's
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002537 definitions. Possible values are
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002538
2539 ppwiz_highlight_defs = 1 : PPWizard #define statements retain the
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002540 colors of their contents (e.g. PPWizard macros and variables)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002541
2542 ppwiz_highlight_defs = 2 : preprocessor #define and #evaluate
2543 statements are shown in a single color with the exception of line
2544 continuation symbols
2545
2546 The default setting for ppwiz_highlight_defs is 1.
2547
2548- ppwiz_with_html : If the value is 1 (the default), highlight literal
2549 HTML code; if 0, treat HTML code like ordinary text.
2550
2551
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002552PHTML *phtml.vim* *ft-phtml-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002553
2554There are two options for the phtml syntax highlighting.
2555
2556If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings, use this: >
2557
2558 :let phtml_sql_query = 1
2559
2560For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can
2561set "phtml_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: >
2562
2563 :let phtml_minlines = 200
2564
2565
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002566POSTSCRIPT *postscr.vim* *ft-postscr-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002567
2568There are several options when it comes to highlighting PostScript.
2569
2570First which version of the PostScript language to highlight. There are
2571currently three defined language versions, or levels. Level 1 is the original
2572and base version, and includes all extensions prior to the release of level 2.
2573Level 2 is the most common version around, and includes its own set of
2574extensions prior to the release of level 3. Level 3 is currently the highest
2575level supported. You select which level of the PostScript language you want
2576highlighted by defining the postscr_level variable as follows: >
2577
2578 :let postscr_level=2
2579
2580If this variable is not defined it defaults to 2 (level 2) since this is
2581the most prevalent version currently.
2582
2583Note, not all PS interpreters will support all language features for a
2584particular language level. In particular the %!PS-Adobe-3.0 at the start of
2585PS files does NOT mean the PostScript present is level 3 PostScript!
2586
2587If you are working with Display PostScript, you can include highlighting of
2588Display PS language features by defining the postscr_display variable as
2589follows: >
2590
2591 :let postscr_display=1
2592
2593If you are working with Ghostscript, you can include highlighting of
2594Ghostscript specific language features by defining the variable
2595postscr_ghostscript as follows: >
2596
2597 :let postscr_ghostscript=1
2598
2599PostScript is a large language, with many predefined elements. While it
2600useful to have all these elements highlighted, on slower machines this can
2601cause Vim to slow down. In an attempt to be machine friendly font names and
2602character encodings are not highlighted by default. Unless you are working
2603explicitly with either of these this should be ok. If you want them to be
2604highlighted you should set one or both of the following variables: >
2605
2606 :let postscr_fonts=1
2607 :let postscr_encodings=1
2608
2609There is a stylistic option to the highlighting of and, or, and not. In
2610PostScript the function of these operators depends on the types of their
2611operands - if the operands are booleans then they are the logical operators,
2612if they are integers then they are binary operators. As binary and logical
2613operators can be highlighted differently they have to be highlighted one way
2614or the other. By default they are treated as logical operators. They can be
2615highlighted as binary operators by defining the variable
2616postscr_andornot_binary as follows: >
2617
2618 :let postscr_andornot_binary=1
2619<
2620
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002621 *ptcap.vim* *ft-printcap-syntax*
2622PRINTCAP + TERMCAP *ft-ptcap-syntax* *ft-termcap-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002623
2624This syntax file applies to the printcap and termcap databases.
2625
2626In order for Vim to recognize printcap/termcap files that do not match
2627the patterns *printcap*, or *termcap*, you must put additional patterns
2628appropriate to your system in your |myfiletypefile| file. For these
2629patterns, you must set the variable "b:ptcap_type" to either "print" or
2630"term", and then the 'filetype' option to ptcap.
2631
2632For example, to make Vim identify all files in /etc/termcaps/ as termcap
2633files, add the following: >
2634
2635 :au BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/termcaps/* let b:ptcap_type = "term" |
2636 \ set filetype=ptcap
2637
2638If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which
2639are fixed when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "ptcap_minlines"
2640internal variable to a larger number: >
2641
2642 :let ptcap_minlines = 50
2643
2644(The default is 20 lines.)
2645
2646
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002647PROGRESS *progress.vim* *ft-progress-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002648
2649Files matching "*.w" could be Progress or cweb. If the automatic detection
2650doesn't work for you, or you don't edit cweb at all, use this in your
2651startup vimrc: >
2652 :let filetype_w = "progress"
2653The same happens for "*.i", which could be assembly, and "*.p", which could be
2654Pascal. Use this if you don't use assembly and Pascal: >
2655 :let filetype_i = "progress"
2656 :let filetype_p = "progress"
2657
2658
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002659PYTHON *python.vim* *ft-python-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002660
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002661There are six options to control Python syntax highlighting.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002662
2663For highlighted numbers: >
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002664 :let python_no_number_highlight = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002665
2666For highlighted builtin functions: >
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002667 :let python_no_builtin_highlight = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002668
2669For highlighted standard exceptions: >
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002670 :let python_no_exception_highlight = 1
2671
2672For highlighted doctests and code inside: >
2673 :let python_no_doctest_highlight = 1
2674or >
2675 :let python_no_doctest_code_highlight = 1
2676(first option implies second one).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002677
Bram Moolenaar4a748032010-09-30 21:47:56 +02002678For highlighted trailing whitespace and mix of spaces and tabs: >
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002679 :let python_space_error_highlight = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002680
2681If you want all possible Python highlighting (the same as setting the
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002682preceding last option and unsetting all other ones): >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002683 :let python_highlight_all = 1
2684
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002685Note: only existence of these options matter, not their value. You can replace
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002686 1 above with anything.
2687
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002688QUAKE *quake.vim* *ft-quake-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002689
2690The Quake syntax definition should work for most any FPS (First Person
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002691Shooter) based on one of the Quake engines. However, the command names vary
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002692a bit between the three games (Quake, Quake 2, and Quake 3 Arena) so the
2693syntax definition checks for the existence of three global variables to allow
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002694users to specify what commands are legal in their files. The three variables
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002695can be set for the following effects:
2696
2697set to highlight commands only available in Quake: >
2698 :let quake_is_quake1 = 1
2699
2700set to highlight commands only available in Quake 2: >
2701 :let quake_is_quake2 = 1
2702
2703set to highlight commands only available in Quake 3 Arena: >
2704 :let quake_is_quake3 = 1
2705
2706Any combination of these three variables is legal, but might highlight more
2707commands than are actually available to you by the game.
2708
2709
Bram Moolenaarfc65cab2018-08-28 22:58:02 +02002710R *r.vim* *ft-r-syntax*
2711
2712The parsing of R code for syntax highlight starts 40 lines backwards, but you
2713can set a different value in your |vimrc|. Example: >
2714 let r_syntax_minlines = 60
2715
2716You can also turn off syntax highlighting of ROxygen: >
2717 let r_syntax_hl_roxygen = 0
2718
2719enable folding of code delimited by parentheses, square brackets and curly
2720braces: >
2721 let r_syntax_folding = 1
2722
2723and highlight as functions all keywords followed by an opening parenthesis: >
2724 let r_syntax_fun_pattern = 1
2725
2726
2727R MARKDOWN *rmd.vim* *ft-rmd-syntax*
2728
2729To disable syntax highlight of YAML header, add to your |vimrc|: >
2730 let rmd_syn_hl_yaml = 0
2731
2732To disable syntax highlighting of citation keys: >
2733 let rmd_syn_hl_citations = 0
2734
2735To highlight R code in knitr chunk headers: >
2736 let rmd_syn_hl_chunk = 1
2737
2738By default, chunks of R code will be highlighted following the rules of R
2739language. If you want proper syntax highlighting of chunks of other languages,
2740you should add them to either `markdown_fenced_languages` or
2741`rmd_fenced_languages`. For example to properly highlight both R and Python,
2742you may add this to your |vimrc|: >
2743 let rmd_fenced_languages = ['r', 'python']
2744
2745
2746R RESTRUCTURED TEXT *rrst.vim* *ft-rrst-syntax*
2747
2748To highlight R code in knitr chunk headers, add to your |vimrc|: >
2749 let rrst_syn_hl_chunk = 1
2750
2751
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002752READLINE *readline.vim* *ft-readline-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002753
2754The readline library is primarily used by the BASH shell, which adds quite a
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002755few commands and options to the ones already available. To highlight these
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002756items as well you can add the following to your |vimrc| or just type it in the
2757command line before loading a file with the readline syntax: >
2758 let readline_has_bash = 1
2759
2760This will add highlighting for the commands that BASH (version 2.05a and
2761later, and part earlier) adds.
2762
2763
Bram Moolenaar95a9dd12019-12-19 22:12:03 +01002764REGO *rego.vim* *ft-rego-syntax*
2765
2766Rego is a query language developed by Styra. It is mostly used as a policy
2767language for kubernetes, but can be applied to almost anything. Files with
2768the following extensions are recognized as rego files: .rego.
2769
2770
Bram Moolenaar97d62492012-11-15 21:28:22 +01002771RESTRUCTURED TEXT *rst.vim* *ft-rst-syntax*
2772
Bram Moolenaar4c05fa02019-01-01 15:32:17 +01002773Syntax highlighting is enabled for code blocks within the document for a
2774select number of file types. See $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/rst.vim for the default
2775syntax list.
2776
2777To set a user-defined list of code block syntax highlighting: >
Bram Moolenaar97d62492012-11-15 21:28:22 +01002778 let rst_syntax_code_list = ['vim', 'lisp', ...]
Bram Moolenaar4c05fa02019-01-01 15:32:17 +01002779
2780To assign multiple code block types to a single syntax, define
2781`rst_syntax_code_list` as a mapping: >
2782 let rst_syntax_code_list = {
Bram Moolenaar0c0734d2019-11-26 21:44:46 +01002783 \ 'cpp': ['cpp', 'c++'],
2784 \ 'bash': ['bash', 'sh'],
Bram Moolenaar4c05fa02019-01-01 15:32:17 +01002785 ...
Bram Moolenaar0c0734d2019-11-26 21:44:46 +01002786 \ }
Bram Moolenaar4c05fa02019-01-01 15:32:17 +01002787
2788To use color highlighting for emphasis text: >
2789 let rst_use_emphasis_colors = 1
2790
2791To enable folding of sections: >
2792 let rst_fold_enabled = 1
2793
2794Note that folding can cause performance issues on some platforms.
2795
Bram Moolenaar97d62492012-11-15 21:28:22 +01002796
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002797REXX *rexx.vim* *ft-rexx-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002798
2799If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed
2800when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "rexx_minlines" internal variable
2801to a larger number: >
2802 :let rexx_minlines = 50
2803This will make the syntax synchronization start 50 lines before the first
2804displayed line. The default value is 10. The disadvantage of using a larger
2805number is that redrawing can become slow.
2806
Bram Moolenaar97293012011-07-18 19:40:27 +02002807Vim tries to guess what type a ".r" file is. If it can't be detected (from
2808comment lines), the default is "r". To make the default rexx add this line to
2809your .vimrc: *g:filetype_r*
2810>
2811 :let g:filetype_r = "r"
2812
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002813
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002814RUBY *ruby.vim* *ft-ruby-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002815
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002816 Ruby: Operator highlighting |ruby_operators|
2817 Ruby: Whitespace errors |ruby_space_errors|
2818 Ruby: Folding |ruby_fold| |ruby_foldable_groups|
2819 Ruby: Reducing expensive operations |ruby_no_expensive| |ruby_minlines|
2820 Ruby: Spellchecking strings |ruby_spellcheck_strings|
2821
2822 *ruby_operators*
2823 Ruby: Operator highlighting ~
2824
2825Operators can be highlighted by defining "ruby_operators": >
2826
2827 :let ruby_operators = 1
2828<
2829 *ruby_space_errors*
2830 Ruby: Whitespace errors ~
2831
2832Whitespace errors can be highlighted by defining "ruby_space_errors": >
2833
2834 :let ruby_space_errors = 1
2835<
2836This will highlight trailing whitespace and tabs preceded by a space character
2837as errors. This can be refined by defining "ruby_no_trail_space_error" and
2838"ruby_no_tab_space_error" which will ignore trailing whitespace and tabs after
2839spaces respectively.
2840
2841 *ruby_fold* *ruby_foldable_groups*
2842 Ruby: Folding ~
2843
2844Folding can be enabled by defining "ruby_fold": >
2845
2846 :let ruby_fold = 1
2847<
2848This will set the value of 'foldmethod' to "syntax" locally to the current
2849buffer or window, which will enable syntax-based folding when editing Ruby
2850filetypes.
2851
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002852Default folding is rather detailed, i.e., small syntax units like "if", "do",
2853"%w[]" may create corresponding fold levels.
2854
2855You can set "ruby_foldable_groups" to restrict which groups are foldable: >
2856
2857 :let ruby_foldable_groups = 'if case %'
2858<
2859The value is a space-separated list of keywords:
2860
2861 keyword meaning ~
2862 -------- ------------------------------------- ~
2863 ALL Most block syntax (default)
2864 NONE Nothing
2865 if "if" or "unless" block
2866 def "def" block
2867 class "class" block
2868 module "module" block
2869 do "do" block
2870 begin "begin" block
2871 case "case" block
2872 for "for", "while", "until" loops
2873 { Curly bracket block or hash literal
2874 [ Array literal
2875 % Literal with "%" notation, e.g.: %w(STRING), %!STRING!
2876 / Regexp
2877 string String and shell command output (surrounded by ', ", `)
2878 : Symbol
2879 # Multiline comment
2880 << Here documents
2881 __END__ Source code after "__END__" directive
2882
2883 *ruby_no_expensive*
2884 Ruby: Reducing expensive operations ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002885
2886By default, the "end" keyword is colorized according to the opening statement
Bram Moolenaar943d2b52005-12-02 00:50:49 +00002887of the block it closes. While useful, this feature can be expensive; if you
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002888experience slow redrawing (or you are on a terminal with poor color support)
2889you may want to turn it off by defining the "ruby_no_expensive" variable: >
Bram Moolenaar943d2b52005-12-02 00:50:49 +00002890
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002891 :let ruby_no_expensive = 1
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00002892<
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002893In this case the same color will be used for all control keywords.
2894
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002895 *ruby_minlines*
2896
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002897If you do want this feature enabled, but notice highlighting errors while
2898scrolling backwards, which are fixed when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting
2899the "ruby_minlines" variable to a value larger than 50: >
Bram Moolenaar943d2b52005-12-02 00:50:49 +00002900
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002901 :let ruby_minlines = 100
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00002902<
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002903Ideally, this value should be a number of lines large enough to embrace your
2904largest class or module.
2905
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002906 *ruby_spellcheck_strings*
2907 Ruby: Spellchecking strings ~
Bram Moolenaar943d2b52005-12-02 00:50:49 +00002908
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002909Ruby syntax will perform spellchecking of strings if you define
2910"ruby_spellcheck_strings": >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002911
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002912 :let ruby_spellcheck_strings = 1
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00002913<
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00002914
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002915SCHEME *scheme.vim* *ft-scheme-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00002916
Bram Moolenaar72540672018-02-09 22:00:53 +01002917By default only R7RS keywords are highlighted and properly indented.
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00002918
Bram Moolenaar72540672018-02-09 22:00:53 +01002919scheme.vim also supports extensions of the CHICKEN Scheme->C compiler.
2920Define b:is_chicken or g:is_chicken, if you need them.
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00002921
2922
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002923SDL *sdl.vim* *ft-sdl-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002924
2925The SDL highlighting probably misses a few keywords, but SDL has so many
2926of them it's almost impossibly to cope.
2927
2928The new standard, SDL-2000, specifies that all identifiers are
2929case-sensitive (which was not so before), and that all keywords can be
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002930used either completely lowercase or completely uppercase. To have the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002931highlighting reflect this, you can set the following variable: >
2932 :let sdl_2000=1
2933
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002934This also sets many new keywords. If you want to disable the old
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002935keywords, which is probably a good idea, use: >
2936 :let SDL_no_96=1
2937
2938
2939The indentation is probably also incomplete, but right now I am very
2940satisfied with it for my own projects.
2941
2942
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002943SED *sed.vim* *ft-sed-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002944
2945To make tabs stand out from regular blanks (accomplished by using Todo
2946highlighting on the tabs), define "highlight_sedtabs" by putting >
2947
2948 :let highlight_sedtabs = 1
2949
2950in the vimrc file. (This special highlighting only applies for tabs
2951inside search patterns, replacement texts, addresses or text included
2952by an Append/Change/Insert command.) If you enable this option, it is
2953also a good idea to set the tab width to one character; by doing that,
2954you can easily count the number of tabs in a string.
2955
2956Bugs:
2957
2958 The transform command (y) is treated exactly like the substitute
2959 command. This means that, as far as this syntax file is concerned,
2960 transform accepts the same flags as substitute, which is wrong.
2961 (Transform accepts no flags.) I tolerate this bug because the
2962 involved commands need very complex treatment (95 patterns, one for
2963 each plausible pattern delimiter).
2964
2965
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002966SGML *sgml.vim* *ft-sgml-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002967
2968The coloring scheme for tags in the SGML file works as follows.
2969
2970The <> of opening tags are colored differently than the </> of a closing tag.
2971This is on purpose! For opening tags the 'Function' color is used, while for
2972closing tags the 'Type' color is used (See syntax.vim to check how those are
2973defined for you)
2974
2975Known tag names are colored the same way as statements in C. Unknown tag
2976names are not colored which makes it easy to spot errors.
2977
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002978Note that the same is true for argument (or attribute) names. Known attribute
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002979names are colored differently than unknown ones.
2980
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002981Some SGML tags are used to change the rendering of text. The following tags
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002982are recognized by the sgml.vim syntax coloring file and change the way normal
2983text is shown: <varname> <emphasis> <command> <function> <literal>
2984<replaceable> <ulink> and <link>.
2985
2986If you want to change how such text is rendered, you must redefine the
2987following syntax groups:
2988
2989 - sgmlBold
2990 - sgmlBoldItalic
2991 - sgmlUnderline
2992 - sgmlItalic
2993 - sgmlLink for links
2994
2995To make this redefinition work you must redefine them all and define the
2996following variable in your vimrc (this is due to the order in which the files
2997are read during initialization) >
2998 let sgml_my_rendering=1
2999
3000You can also disable this rendering by adding the following line to your
3001vimrc file: >
3002 let sgml_no_rendering=1
3003
3004(Adapted from the html.vim help text by Claudio Fleiner <claudio@fleiner.com>)
3005
3006
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003007 *ft-posix-synax* *ft-dash-syntax*
3008SH *sh.vim* *ft-sh-syntax* *ft-bash-syntax* *ft-ksh-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003009
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003010This covers syntax highlighting for the older Unix (Bourne) sh, and newer
3011shells such as bash, dash, posix, and the Korn shells.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003012
3013Vim attempts to determine which shell type is in use by specifying that
Bram Moolenaar91f84f62018-07-29 15:07:52 +02003014various filenames are of specific types, e.g.: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003015
3016 ksh : .kshrc* *.ksh
3017 bash: .bashrc* bashrc bash.bashrc .bash_profile* *.bash
3018<
Bram Moolenaar91f84f62018-07-29 15:07:52 +02003019See $VIMRUNTIME/filetype.vim for the full list of patterns. If none of these
3020cases pertain, then the first line of the file is examined (ex. looking for
3021/bin/sh /bin/ksh /bin/bash). If the first line specifies a shelltype, then
3022that shelltype is used. However some files (ex. .profile) are known to be
3023shell files but the type is not apparent. Furthermore, on many systems sh is
3024symbolically linked to "bash" (Linux, Windows+cygwin) or "ksh" (Posix).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003025
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003026One may specify a global default by instantiating one of the following
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003027variables in your <.vimrc>:
3028
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003029 ksh: >
Bram Moolenaar7fc904b2006-04-13 20:37:35 +00003030 let g:is_kornshell = 1
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003031< posix: (using this is the nearly the same as setting g:is_kornshell to 1) >
Bram Moolenaar7fc904b2006-04-13 20:37:35 +00003032 let g:is_posix = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003033< bash: >
Bram Moolenaar7fc904b2006-04-13 20:37:35 +00003034 let g:is_bash = 1
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003035< sh: (default) Bourne shell >
Bram Moolenaar7fc904b2006-04-13 20:37:35 +00003036 let g:is_sh = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003037
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003038< (dash users should use posix)
3039
Bram Moolenaar910f66f2006-04-05 20:41:53 +00003040If there's no "#! ..." line, and the user hasn't availed himself/herself of a
3041default sh.vim syntax setting as just shown, then syntax/sh.vim will assume
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003042the Bourne shell syntax. No need to quote RFCs or market penetration
3043statistics in error reports, please -- just select the default version of the
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003044sh your system uses and install the associated "let..." in your <.vimrc>.
Bram Moolenaar910f66f2006-04-05 20:41:53 +00003045
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003046The syntax/sh.vim file provides several levels of syntax-based folding: >
3047
3048 let g:sh_fold_enabled= 0 (default, no syntax folding)
3049 let g:sh_fold_enabled= 1 (enable function folding)
3050 let g:sh_fold_enabled= 2 (enable heredoc folding)
3051 let g:sh_fold_enabled= 4 (enable if/do/for folding)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003052>
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003053then various syntax items (ie. HereDocuments and function bodies) become
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003054syntax-foldable (see |:syn-fold|). You also may add these together
3055to get multiple types of folding: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003056
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003057 let g:sh_fold_enabled= 3 (enables function and heredoc folding)
3058
3059If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards which are fixed
3060when one redraws with CTRL-L, try setting the "sh_minlines" internal variable
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003061to a larger number. Example: >
3062
3063 let sh_minlines = 500
3064
3065This will make syntax synchronization start 500 lines before the first
3066displayed line. The default value is 200. The disadvantage of using a larger
3067number is that redrawing can become slow.
3068
3069If you don't have much to synchronize on, displaying can be very slow. To
3070reduce this, the "sh_maxlines" internal variable can be set. Example: >
3071
3072 let sh_maxlines = 100
3073<
3074The default is to use the twice sh_minlines. Set it to a smaller number to
3075speed up displaying. The disadvantage is that highlight errors may appear.
3076
Bram Moolenaar3df01732017-02-17 22:47:16 +01003077syntax/sh.vim tries to flag certain problems as errors; usually things like
3078extra ']'s, 'done's, 'fi's, etc. If you find the error handling problematic
3079for your purposes, you may suppress such error highlighting by putting
3080the following line in your .vimrc: >
3081
3082 let g:sh_no_error= 1
3083<
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003084
Bram Moolenaard960d762011-09-21 19:22:10 +02003085 *sh-embed* *sh-awk*
3086 Sh: EMBEDDING LANGUAGES~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003087
Bram Moolenaard960d762011-09-21 19:22:10 +02003088You may wish to embed languages into sh. I'll give an example courtesy of
3089Lorance Stinson on how to do this with awk as an example. Put the following
3090file into $HOME/.vim/after/syntax/sh/awkembed.vim: >
3091
Bram Moolenaardae8d212016-02-27 22:40:16 +01003092 " AWK Embedding:
Bram Moolenaard960d762011-09-21 19:22:10 +02003093 " ==============
3094 " Shamelessly ripped from aspperl.vim by Aaron Hope.
3095 if exists("b:current_syntax")
3096 unlet b:current_syntax
3097 endif
3098 syn include @AWKScript syntax/awk.vim
3099 syn region AWKScriptCode matchgroup=AWKCommand start=+[=\\]\@<!'+ skip=+\\'+ end=+'+ contains=@AWKScript contained
3100 syn region AWKScriptEmbedded matchgroup=AWKCommand start=+\<awk\>+ skip=+\\$+ end=+[=\\]\@<!'+me=e-1 contains=@shIdList,@shExprList2 nextgroup=AWKScriptCode
3101 syn cluster shCommandSubList add=AWKScriptEmbedded
3102 hi def link AWKCommand Type
3103<
3104This code will then let the awk code in the single quotes: >
3105 awk '...awk code here...'
3106be highlighted using the awk highlighting syntax. Clearly this may be
3107extended to other languages.
3108
3109
3110SPEEDUP *spup.vim* *ft-spup-syntax*
3111(AspenTech plant simulator)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003112
3113The Speedup syntax file has some options:
3114
3115- strict_subsections : If this variable is defined, only keywords for
3116 sections and subsections will be highlighted as statements but not
3117 other keywords (like WITHIN in the OPERATION section).
3118
3119- highlight_types : Definition of this variable causes stream types
3120 like temperature or pressure to be highlighted as Type, not as a
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003121 plain Identifier. Included are the types that are usually found in
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003122 the DECLARE section; if you defined own types, you have to include
3123 them in the syntax file.
3124
3125- oneline_comments : this value ranges from 1 to 3 and determines the
3126 highlighting of # style comments.
3127
3128 oneline_comments = 1 : allow normal Speedup code after an even
3129 number of #s.
3130
3131 oneline_comments = 2 : show code starting with the second # as
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003132 error. This is the default setting.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003133
3134 oneline_comments = 3 : show the whole line as error if it contains
3135 more than one #.
3136
3137Since especially OPERATION sections tend to become very large due to
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003138PRESETting variables, syncing may be critical. If your computer is
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003139fast enough, you can increase minlines and/or maxlines near the end of
3140the syntax file.
3141
3142
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00003143SQL *sql.vim* *ft-sql-syntax*
3144 *sqlinformix.vim* *ft-sqlinformix-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar1056d982006-03-09 22:37:52 +00003145 *sqlanywhere.vim* *ft-sqlanywhere-syntax*
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00003146
Bram Moolenaar1056d982006-03-09 22:37:52 +00003147While there is an ANSI standard for SQL, most database engines add their own
3148custom extensions. Vim currently supports the Oracle and Informix dialects of
3149SQL. Vim assumes "*.sql" files are Oracle SQL by default.
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00003150
Bram Moolenaar1056d982006-03-09 22:37:52 +00003151Vim currently has SQL support for a variety of different vendors via syntax
3152scripts. You can change Vim's default from Oracle to any of the current SQL
3153supported types. You can also easily alter the SQL dialect being used on a
3154buffer by buffer basis.
3155
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003156For more detailed instructions see |ft_sql.txt|.
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00003157
3158
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00003159TCSH *tcsh.vim* *ft-tcsh-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003160
3161This covers the shell named "tcsh". It is a superset of csh. See |csh.vim|
3162for how the filetype is detected.
3163
3164Tcsh does not allow \" in strings unless the "backslash_quote" shell variable
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003165is set. If you want VIM to assume that no backslash quote constructs exist add
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003166this line to your .vimrc: >
3167
3168 :let tcsh_backslash_quote = 0
3169
3170If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed
3171when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "tcsh_minlines" internal variable
3172to a larger number: >
3173
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01003174 :let tcsh_minlines = 1000
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003175
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01003176This will make the syntax synchronization start 1000 lines before the first
3177displayed line. If you set "tcsh_minlines" to "fromstart", then
3178synchronization is done from the start of the file. The default value for
3179tcsh_minlines is 100. The disadvantage of using a larger number is that
3180redrawing can become slow.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003181
3182
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003183TEX *tex.vim* *ft-tex-syntax* *latex-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003184
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003185 Tex Contents~
3186 Tex: Want Syntax Folding? |tex-folding|
3187 Tex: No Spell Checking Wanted |g:tex_nospell|
3188 Tex: Don't Want Spell Checking In Comments? |tex-nospell|
3189 Tex: Want Spell Checking in Verbatim Zones? |tex-verb|
3190 Tex: Run-on Comments or MathZones |tex-runon|
3191 Tex: Slow Syntax Highlighting? |tex-slow|
3192 Tex: Want To Highlight More Commands? |tex-morecommands|
3193 Tex: Excessive Error Highlighting? |tex-error|
3194 Tex: Need a new Math Group? |tex-math|
3195 Tex: Starting a New Style? |tex-style|
3196 Tex: Taking Advantage of Conceal Mode |tex-conceal|
3197 Tex: Selective Conceal Mode |g:tex_conceal|
3198 Tex: Controlling iskeyword |g:tex_isk|
Bram Moolenaar6e932462014-09-09 18:48:09 +02003199 Tex: Fine Subscript and Superscript Control |tex-supersub|
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003200
3201 *tex-folding* *g:tex_fold_enabled*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003202 Tex: Want Syntax Folding? ~
Bram Moolenaar488c6512005-08-11 20:09:58 +00003203
3204As of version 28 of <syntax/tex.vim>, syntax-based folding of parts, chapters,
3205sections, subsections, etc are supported. Put >
3206 let g:tex_fold_enabled=1
3207in your <.vimrc>, and :set fdm=syntax. I suggest doing the latter via a
3208modeline at the end of your LaTeX file: >
3209 % vim: fdm=syntax
Bram Moolenaard960d762011-09-21 19:22:10 +02003210If your system becomes too slow, then you might wish to look into >
Bram Moolenaar6c1e1572019-06-22 02:13:00 +02003211 https://vimhelp.org/vim_faq.txt.html#faq-29.7
Bram Moolenaar488c6512005-08-11 20:09:58 +00003212<
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003213 *g:tex_nospell*
3214 Tex: No Spell Checking Wanted~
3215
3216If you don't want spell checking anywhere in your LaTeX document, put >
3217 let g:tex_nospell=1
3218into your .vimrc. If you merely wish to suppress spell checking inside
3219comments only, see |g:tex_comment_nospell|.
3220
3221 *tex-nospell* *g:tex_comment_nospell*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003222 Tex: Don't Want Spell Checking In Comments? ~
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003223
3224Some folks like to include things like source code in comments and so would
3225prefer that spell checking be disabled in comments in LaTeX files. To do
3226this, put the following in your <.vimrc>: >
3227 let g:tex_comment_nospell= 1
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003228If you want to suppress spell checking everywhere inside your LaTeX document,
3229see |g:tex_nospell|.
3230
3231 *tex-verb* *g:tex_verbspell*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003232 Tex: Want Spell Checking in Verbatim Zones?~
Bram Moolenaar74cbdf02010-08-04 23:03:17 +02003233
3234Often verbatim regions are used for things like source code; seldom does
3235one want source code spell-checked. However, for those of you who do
3236want your verbatim zones spell-checked, put the following in your <.vimrc>: >
3237 let g:tex_verbspell= 1
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003238<
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003239 *tex-runon* *tex-stopzone*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003240 Tex: Run-on Comments or MathZones ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003241
Bram Moolenaar488c6512005-08-11 20:09:58 +00003242The <syntax/tex.vim> highlighting supports TeX, LaTeX, and some AmsTeX. The
3243highlighting supports three primary zones/regions: normal, texZone, and
3244texMathZone. Although considerable effort has been made to have these zones
3245terminate properly, zones delineated by $..$ and $$..$$ cannot be synchronized
3246as there's no difference between start and end patterns. Consequently, a
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003247special "TeX comment" has been provided >
3248 %stopzone
3249which will forcibly terminate the highlighting of either a texZone or a
3250texMathZone.
3251
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003252 *tex-slow* *tex-sync*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003253 Tex: Slow Syntax Highlighting? ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003254
3255If you have a slow computer, you may wish to reduce the values for >
3256 :syn sync maxlines=200
3257 :syn sync minlines=50
3258(especially the latter). If your computer is fast, you may wish to
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003259increase them. This primarily affects synchronizing (i.e. just what group,
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003260if any, is the text at the top of the screen supposed to be in?).
3261
Bram Moolenaard960d762011-09-21 19:22:10 +02003262Another cause of slow highlighting is due to syntax-driven folding; see
3263|tex-folding| for a way around this.
3264
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003265 *g:tex_fast*
3266
3267Finally, if syntax highlighting is still too slow, you may set >
3268
3269 :let g:tex_fast= ""
3270
3271in your .vimrc. Used this way, the g:tex_fast variable causes the syntax
3272highlighting script to avoid defining any regions and associated
3273synchronization. The result will be much faster syntax highlighting; the
3274price: you will no longer have as much highlighting or any syntax-based
3275folding, and you will be missing syntax-based error checking.
3276
3277You may decide that some syntax is acceptable; you may use the following table
3278selectively to enable just some syntax highlighting: >
3279
3280 b : allow bold and italic syntax
3281 c : allow texComment syntax
3282 m : allow texMatcher syntax (ie. {...} and [...])
3283 M : allow texMath syntax
3284 p : allow parts, chapter, section, etc syntax
3285 r : allow texRefZone syntax (nocite, bibliography, label, pageref, eqref)
3286 s : allow superscript/subscript regions
3287 S : allow texStyle syntax
3288 v : allow verbatim syntax
3289 V : allow texNewEnv and texNewCmd syntax
3290<
3291As an example, let g:tex_fast= "M" will allow math-associated highlighting
3292but suppress all the other region-based syntax highlighting.
Bram Moolenaar6e932462014-09-09 18:48:09 +02003293(also see: |g:tex_conceal| and |tex-supersub|)
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003294
3295 *tex-morecommands* *tex-package*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003296 Tex: Want To Highlight More Commands? ~
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00003297
3298LaTeX is a programmable language, and so there are thousands of packages full
3299of specialized LaTeX commands, syntax, and fonts. If you're using such a
3300package you'll often wish that the distributed syntax/tex.vim would support
3301it. However, clearly this is impractical. So please consider using the
3302techniques in |mysyntaxfile-add| to extend or modify the highlighting provided
Bram Moolenaarb6b046b2011-12-30 13:11:27 +01003303by syntax/tex.vim. Please consider uploading any extensions that you write,
3304which typically would go in $HOME/after/syntax/tex/[pkgname].vim, to
3305http://vim.sf.net/.
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00003306
Bram Moolenaar93a1df22018-09-10 11:51:50 +02003307I've included some support for various popular packages on my website: >
3308
3309 http://www.drchip.org/astronaut/vim/index.html#LATEXPKGS
3310<
3311The syntax files there go into your .../after/syntax/tex/ directory.
3312
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003313 *tex-error* *g:tex_no_error*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003314 Tex: Excessive Error Highlighting? ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003315
3316The <tex.vim> supports lexical error checking of various sorts. Thus,
3317although the error checking is ofttimes very useful, it can indicate
3318errors where none actually are. If this proves to be a problem for you,
3319you may put in your <.vimrc> the following statement: >
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003320 let g:tex_no_error=1
Bram Moolenaar488c6512005-08-11 20:09:58 +00003321and all error checking by <syntax/tex.vim> will be suppressed.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003322
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003323 *tex-math*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003324 Tex: Need a new Math Group? ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003325
3326If you want to include a new math group in your LaTeX, the following
3327code shows you an example as to how you might do so: >
Bram Moolenaar488c6512005-08-11 20:09:58 +00003328 call TexNewMathZone(sfx,mathzone,starform)
3329You'll want to provide the new math group with a unique suffix
3330(currently, A-L and V-Z are taken by <syntax/tex.vim> itself).
3331As an example, consider how eqnarray is set up by <syntax/tex.vim>: >
3332 call TexNewMathZone("D","eqnarray",1)
3333You'll need to change "mathzone" to the name of your new math group,
3334and then to the call to it in .vim/after/syntax/tex.vim.
3335The "starform" variable, if true, implies that your new math group
3336has a starred form (ie. eqnarray*).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003337
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003338 *tex-style* *b:tex_stylish*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003339 Tex: Starting a New Style? ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003340
3341One may use "\makeatletter" in *.tex files, thereby making the use of "@" in
3342commands available. However, since the *.tex file doesn't have one of the
3343following suffices: sty cls clo dtx ltx, the syntax highlighting will flag
3344such use of @ as an error. To solve this: >
3345
3346 :let b:tex_stylish = 1
3347 :set ft=tex
3348
3349Putting "let g:tex_stylish=1" into your <.vimrc> will make <syntax/tex.vim>
3350always accept such use of @.
3351
Bram Moolenaar611df5b2010-07-26 22:51:56 +02003352 *tex-cchar* *tex-cole* *tex-conceal*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003353 Tex: Taking Advantage of Conceal Mode~
Bram Moolenaar611df5b2010-07-26 22:51:56 +02003354
Bram Moolenaar477db062010-07-28 18:17:41 +02003355If you have |'conceallevel'| set to 2 and if your encoding is utf-8, then a
3356number of character sequences can be translated into appropriate utf-8 glyphs,
3357including various accented characters, Greek characters in MathZones, and
3358superscripts and subscripts in MathZones. Not all characters can be made into
3359superscripts or subscripts; the constraint is due to what utf-8 supports.
3360In fact, only a few characters are supported as subscripts.
3361
3362One way to use this is to have vertically split windows (see |CTRL-W_v|); one
3363with |'conceallevel'| at 0 and the other at 2; and both using |'scrollbind'|.
Bram Moolenaar611df5b2010-07-26 22:51:56 +02003364
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003365 *g:tex_conceal*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003366 Tex: Selective Conceal Mode~
3367
3368You may selectively use conceal mode by setting g:tex_conceal in your
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003369<.vimrc>. By default, g:tex_conceal is set to "admgs" to enable concealment
3370for the following sets of characters: >
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003371
3372 a = accents/ligatures
Bram Moolenaard38b0552012-04-25 19:07:41 +02003373 b = bold and italic
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003374 d = delimiters
3375 m = math symbols
3376 g = Greek
3377 s = superscripts/subscripts
3378<
3379By leaving one or more of these out, the associated conceal-character
3380substitution will not be made.
3381
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003382 *g:tex_isk* *g:tex_stylish*
3383 Tex: Controlling iskeyword~
3384
3385Normally, LaTeX keywords support 0-9, a-z, A-z, and 192-255 only. Latex
3386keywords don't support the underscore - except when in *.sty files. The
3387syntax highlighting script handles this with the following logic:
3388
3389 * If g:tex_stylish exists and is 1
3390 then the file will be treated as a "sty" file, so the "_"
3391 will be allowed as part of keywords
Bram Moolenaar3df01732017-02-17 22:47:16 +01003392 (regardless of g:tex_isk)
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003393 * Else if the file's suffix is sty, cls, clo, dtx, or ltx,
3394 then the file will be treated as a "sty" file, so the "_"
3395 will be allowed as part of keywords
Bram Moolenaar3df01732017-02-17 22:47:16 +01003396 (regardless of g:tex_isk)
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003397
3398 * If g:tex_isk exists, then it will be used for the local 'iskeyword'
3399 * Else the local 'iskeyword' will be set to 48-57,a-z,A-Z,192-255
3400
Bram Moolenaar6e932462014-09-09 18:48:09 +02003401 *tex-supersub* *g:tex_superscripts* *g:tex_subscripts*
3402 Tex: Fine Subscript and Superscript Control~
3403
3404 See |tex-conceal| for how to enable concealed character replacement.
3405
3406 See |g:tex_conceal| for selectively concealing accents, bold/italic,
3407 math, Greek, and superscripts/subscripts.
3408
3409 One may exert fine control over which superscripts and subscripts one
3410 wants syntax-based concealment for (see |:syn-cchar|). Since not all
3411 fonts support all characters, one may override the
3412 concealed-replacement lists; by default these lists are given by: >
3413
3414 let g:tex_superscripts= "[0-9a-zA-W.,:;+-<>/()=]"
3415 let g:tex_subscripts= "[0-9aehijklmnoprstuvx,+-/().]"
3416<
3417 For example, I use Luxi Mono Bold; it doesn't support subscript
3418 characters for "hklmnpst", so I put >
3419 let g:tex_subscripts= "[0-9aeijoruvx,+-/().]"
3420< in ~/.vim/ftplugin/tex/tex.vim in order to avoid having inscrutable
3421 utf-8 glyphs appear.
3422
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003423
Bram Moolenaar22dbc772013-06-28 18:44:48 +02003424TF *tf.vim* *ft-tf-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003425
Bram Moolenaar22dbc772013-06-28 18:44:48 +02003426There is one option for the tf syntax highlighting.
3427
3428For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can
3429set "tf_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: >
3430
3431 :let tf_minlines = your choice
3432<
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003433VIM *vim.vim* *ft-vim-syntax*
3434 *g:vimsyn_minlines* *g:vimsyn_maxlines*
Bram Moolenaar996343d2010-07-04 22:20:21 +02003435There is a trade-off between more accurate syntax highlighting versus screen
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003436updating speed. To improve accuracy, you may wish to increase the
3437g:vimsyn_minlines variable. The g:vimsyn_maxlines variable may be used to
3438improve screen updating rates (see |:syn-sync| for more on this). >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003439
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003440 g:vimsyn_minlines : used to set synchronization minlines
3441 g:vimsyn_maxlines : used to set synchronization maxlines
3442<
3443 (g:vim_minlines and g:vim_maxlines are deprecated variants of
3444 these two options)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003445
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003446 *g:vimsyn_embed*
3447The g:vimsyn_embed option allows users to select what, if any, types of
3448embedded script highlighting they wish to have. >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003449
Bram Moolenaara0f849e2015-10-30 14:37:44 +01003450 g:vimsyn_embed == 0 : don't support any embedded scripts
3451 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'l' : support embedded lua
Bram Moolenaar7cba6c02013-09-05 22:13:31 +02003452 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'm' : support embedded mzscheme
3453 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'p' : support embedded perl
3454 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'P' : support embedded python
3455 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'r' : support embedded ruby
3456 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 't' : support embedded tcl
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003457<
Bram Moolenaar7cba6c02013-09-05 22:13:31 +02003458By default, g:vimsyn_embed is a string supporting interpreters that your vim
3459itself supports. Concatenate multiple characters to support multiple types
3460of embedded interpreters; ie. g:vimsyn_embed= "mp" supports embedded mzscheme
3461and embedded perl.
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003462 *g:vimsyn_folding*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003463
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003464Some folding is now supported with syntax/vim.vim: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003465
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003466 g:vimsyn_folding == 0 or doesn't exist: no syntax-based folding
3467 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'a' : augroups
3468 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'f' : fold functions
Bram Moolenaara0f849e2015-10-30 14:37:44 +01003469 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'l' : fold lua script
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003470 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'm' : fold mzscheme script
3471 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'p' : fold perl script
3472 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'P' : fold python script
3473 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'r' : fold ruby script
3474 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 't' : fold tcl script
Bram Moolenaar30b65812012-07-12 22:01:11 +02003475<
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003476 *g:vimsyn_noerror*
Bram Moolenaarb544f3c2017-02-23 19:03:28 +01003477Not all error highlighting that syntax/vim.vim does may be correct; Vim script
3478is a difficult language to highlight correctly. A way to suppress error
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003479highlighting is to put the following line in your |vimrc|: >
Bram Moolenaar437df8f2006-04-27 21:47:44 +00003480
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003481 let g:vimsyn_noerror = 1
3482<
Bram Moolenaar437df8f2006-04-27 21:47:44 +00003483
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003484
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00003485XF86CONFIG *xf86conf.vim* *ft-xf86conf-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003486
3487The syntax of XF86Config file differs in XFree86 v3.x and v4.x. Both
3488variants are supported. Automatic detection is used, but is far from perfect.
3489You may need to specify the version manually. Set the variable
3490xf86conf_xfree86_version to 3 or 4 according to your XFree86 version in
3491your .vimrc. Example: >
3492 :let xf86conf_xfree86_version=3
3493When using a mix of versions, set the b:xf86conf_xfree86_version variable.
3494
3495Note that spaces and underscores in option names are not supported. Use
3496"SyncOnGreen" instead of "__s yn con gr_e_e_n" if you want the option name
3497highlighted.
3498
3499
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00003500XML *xml.vim* *ft-xml-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003501
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003502Xml namespaces are highlighted by default. This can be inhibited by
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003503setting a global variable: >
3504
3505 :let g:xml_namespace_transparent=1
3506<
3507 *xml-folding*
3508The xml syntax file provides syntax |folding| (see |:syn-fold|) between
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003509start and end tags. This can be turned on by >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003510
3511 :let g:xml_syntax_folding = 1
3512 :set foldmethod=syntax
3513
3514Note: syntax folding might slow down syntax highlighting significantly,
3515especially for large files.
3516
3517
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00003518X Pixmaps (XPM) *xpm.vim* *ft-xpm-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003519
3520xpm.vim creates its syntax items dynamically based upon the contents of the
3521XPM file. Thus if you make changes e.g. in the color specification strings,
3522you have to source it again e.g. with ":set syn=xpm".
3523
3524To copy a pixel with one of the colors, yank a "pixel" with "yl" and insert it
3525somewhere else with "P".
3526
3527Do you want to draw with the mouse? Try the following: >
3528 :function! GetPixel()
Bram Moolenaar61660ea2006-04-07 21:40:07 +00003529 : let c = getline(".")[col(".") - 1]
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003530 : echo c
3531 : exe "noremap <LeftMouse> <LeftMouse>r".c
3532 : exe "noremap <LeftDrag> <LeftMouse>r".c
3533 :endfunction
3534 :noremap <RightMouse> <LeftMouse>:call GetPixel()<CR>
3535 :set guicursor=n:hor20 " to see the color beneath the cursor
3536This turns the right button into a pipette and the left button into a pen.
3537It will work with XPM files that have one character per pixel only and you
3538must not click outside of the pixel strings, but feel free to improve it.
3539
3540It will look much better with a font in a quadratic cell size, e.g. for X: >
3541 :set guifont=-*-clean-medium-r-*-*-8-*-*-*-*-80-*
3542
Bram Moolenaar5a5f4592015-04-13 12:43:06 +02003543
3544YAML *yaml.vim* *ft-yaml-syntax*
3545
3546 *g:yaml_schema* *b:yaml_schema*
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01003547A YAML schema is a combination of a set of tags and a mechanism for resolving
3548non-specific tags. For user this means that YAML parser may, depending on
3549plain scalar contents, treat plain scalar (which can actually be only string
3550and nothing else) as a value of the other type: null, boolean, floating-point,
3551integer. `g:yaml_schema` option determines according to which schema values
Bram Moolenaar5a5f4592015-04-13 12:43:06 +02003552will be highlighted specially. Supported schemas are
3553
3554Schema Description ~
3555failsafe No additional highlighting.
3556json Supports JSON-style numbers, booleans and null.
3557core Supports more number, boolean and null styles.
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01003558pyyaml In addition to core schema supports highlighting timestamps,
3559 but there are some differences in what is recognized as
3560 numbers and many additional boolean values not present in core
Bram Moolenaar5a5f4592015-04-13 12:43:06 +02003561 schema.
3562
3563Default schema is `core`.
3564
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01003565Note that schemas are not actually limited to plain scalars, but this is the
3566only difference between schemas defined in YAML specification and the only
Bram Moolenaar5a5f4592015-04-13 12:43:06 +02003567difference defined in the syntax file.
3568
Bram Moolenaarf3913272016-02-25 00:00:01 +01003569
3570ZSH *zsh.vim* *ft-zsh-syntax*
3571
3572The syntax script for zsh allows for syntax-based folding: >
3573
3574 :let g:zsh_fold_enable = 1
3575
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003576==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +010035776. Defining a syntax *:syn-define* *E410*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003578
3579Vim understands three types of syntax items:
3580
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +000035811. Keyword
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003582 It can only contain keyword characters, according to the 'iskeyword'
3583 option. It cannot contain other syntax items. It will only match with a
3584 complete word (there are no keyword characters before or after the match).
3585 The keyword "if" would match in "if(a=b)", but not in "ifdef x", because
3586 "(" is not a keyword character and "d" is.
3587
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +000035882. Match
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003589 This is a match with a single regexp pattern.
3590
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +000035913. Region
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003592 This starts at a match of the "start" regexp pattern and ends with a match
3593 with the "end" regexp pattern. Any other text can appear in between. A
3594 "skip" regexp pattern can be used to avoid matching the "end" pattern.
3595
3596Several syntax ITEMs can be put into one syntax GROUP. For a syntax group
3597you can give highlighting attributes. For example, you could have an item
3598to define a "/* .. */" comment and another one that defines a "// .." comment,
3599and put them both in the "Comment" group. You can then specify that a
3600"Comment" will be in bold font and have a blue color. You are free to make
3601one highlight group for one syntax item, or put all items into one group.
3602This depends on how you want to specify your highlighting attributes. Putting
3603each item in its own group results in having to specify the highlighting
3604for a lot of groups.
3605
3606Note that a syntax group and a highlight group are similar. For a highlight
3607group you will have given highlight attributes. These attributes will be used
3608for the syntax group with the same name.
3609
3610In case more than one item matches at the same position, the one that was
3611defined LAST wins. Thus you can override previously defined syntax items by
3612using an item that matches the same text. But a keyword always goes before a
3613match or region. And a keyword with matching case always goes before a
3614keyword with ignoring case.
3615
3616
3617PRIORITY *:syn-priority*
3618
3619When several syntax items may match, these rules are used:
3620
36211. When multiple Match or Region items start in the same position, the item
3622 defined last has priority.
36232. A Keyword has priority over Match and Region items.
36243. An item that starts in an earlier position has priority over items that
3625 start in later positions.
3626
3627
3628DEFINING CASE *:syn-case* *E390*
3629
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +00003630:sy[ntax] case [match | ignore]
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003631 This defines if the following ":syntax" commands will work with
3632 matching case, when using "match", or with ignoring case, when using
3633 "ignore". Note that any items before this are not affected, and all
3634 items until the next ":syntax case" command are affected.
3635
Bram Moolenaar690afe12017-01-28 18:34:47 +01003636:sy[ntax] case
3637 Show either "syntax case match" or "syntax case ignore" (translated).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003638
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +00003639SPELL CHECKING *:syn-spell*
3640
3641:sy[ntax] spell [toplevel | notoplevel | default]
3642 This defines where spell checking is to be done for text that is not
3643 in a syntax item:
3644
3645 toplevel: Text is spell checked.
3646 notoplevel: Text is not spell checked.
3647 default: When there is a @Spell cluster no spell checking.
3648
3649 For text in syntax items use the @Spell and @NoSpell clusters
3650 |spell-syntax|. When there is no @Spell and no @NoSpell cluster then
3651 spell checking is done for "default" and "toplevel".
3652
3653 To activate spell checking the 'spell' option must be set.
3654
Bram Moolenaar690afe12017-01-28 18:34:47 +01003655:sy[ntax] spell
3656 Show either "syntax spell toplevel", "syntax spell notoplevel" or
3657 "syntax spell default" (translated).
3658
3659
Bram Moolenaarb8060fe2016-01-19 22:29:28 +01003660SYNTAX ISKEYWORD SETTING *:syn-iskeyword*
3661
3662:sy[ntax] iskeyword [clear | {option}]
3663 This defines the keyword characters. It's like the 'iskeyword' option
3664 for but only applies to syntax highlighting.
3665
3666 clear: Syntax specific iskeyword setting is disabled and the
3667 buffer-local 'iskeyword' setting is used.
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01003668 {option} Set the syntax 'iskeyword' option to a new value.
Bram Moolenaarb8060fe2016-01-19 22:29:28 +01003669
3670 Example: >
3671 :syntax iskeyword @,48-57,192-255,$,_
3672<
3673 This would set the syntax specific iskeyword option to include all
3674 alphabetic characters, plus the numeric characters, all accented
3675 characters and also includes the "_" and the "$".
3676
3677 If no argument is given, the current value will be output.
3678
3679 Setting this option influences what |/\k| matches in syntax patterns
Bram Moolenaar298b4402016-01-28 22:38:53 +01003680 and also determines where |:syn-keyword| will be checked for a new
Bram Moolenaarb8060fe2016-01-19 22:29:28 +01003681 match.
3682
Bram Moolenaard0796902016-09-16 20:02:31 +02003683 It is recommended when writing syntax files, to use this command to
3684 set the correct value for the specific syntax language and not change
Bram Moolenaarb8060fe2016-01-19 22:29:28 +01003685 the 'iskeyword' option.
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +00003686
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003687DEFINING KEYWORDS *:syn-keyword*
3688
3689:sy[ntax] keyword {group-name} [{options}] {keyword} .. [{options}]
3690
3691 This defines a number of keywords.
3692
3693 {group-name} Is a syntax group name such as "Comment".
3694 [{options}] See |:syn-arguments| below.
3695 {keyword} .. Is a list of keywords which are part of this group.
3696
3697 Example: >
3698 :syntax keyword Type int long char
3699<
3700 The {options} can be given anywhere in the line. They will apply to
3701 all keywords given, also for options that come after a keyword.
3702 These examples do exactly the same: >
3703 :syntax keyword Type contained int long char
3704 :syntax keyword Type int long contained char
3705 :syntax keyword Type int long char contained
Bram Moolenaar88774fd2015-08-25 19:52:04 +02003706< *E789* *E890*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003707 When you have a keyword with an optional tail, like Ex commands in
3708 Vim, you can put the optional characters inside [], to define all the
3709 variations at once: >
3710 :syntax keyword vimCommand ab[breviate] n[ext]
3711<
3712 Don't forget that a keyword can only be recognized if all the
3713 characters are included in the 'iskeyword' option. If one character
3714 isn't, the keyword will never be recognized.
3715 Multi-byte characters can also be used. These do not have to be in
3716 'iskeyword'.
Bram Moolenaarb8060fe2016-01-19 22:29:28 +01003717 See |:syn-iskeyword| for defining syntax specific iskeyword settings.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003718
3719 A keyword always has higher priority than a match or region, the
3720 keyword is used if more than one item matches. Keywords do not nest
3721 and a keyword can't contain anything else.
3722
3723 Note that when you have a keyword that is the same as an option (even
3724 one that isn't allowed here), you can not use it. Use a match
3725 instead.
3726
3727 The maximum length of a keyword is 80 characters.
3728
3729 The same keyword can be defined multiple times, when its containment
3730 differs. For example, you can define the keyword once not contained
3731 and use one highlight group, and once contained, and use a different
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003732 highlight group. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003733 :syn keyword vimCommand tag
3734 :syn keyword vimSetting contained tag
3735< When finding "tag" outside of any syntax item, the "vimCommand"
3736 highlight group is used. When finding "tag" in a syntax item that
3737 contains "vimSetting", the "vimSetting" group is used.
3738
3739
3740DEFINING MATCHES *:syn-match*
3741
Bram Moolenaar2ec618c2016-10-01 14:47:05 +02003742:sy[ntax] match {group-name} [{options}]
3743 [excludenl]
3744 [keepend]
3745 {pattern}
3746 [{options}]
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003747
3748 This defines one match.
3749
3750 {group-name} A syntax group name such as "Comment".
3751 [{options}] See |:syn-arguments| below.
3752 [excludenl] Don't make a pattern with the end-of-line "$"
3753 extend a containing match or region. Must be
3754 given before the pattern. |:syn-excludenl|
Bram Moolenaar2ec618c2016-10-01 14:47:05 +02003755 keepend Don't allow contained matches to go past a
3756 match with the end pattern. See
3757 |:syn-keepend|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003758 {pattern} The search pattern that defines the match.
3759 See |:syn-pattern| below.
3760 Note that the pattern may match more than one
3761 line, which makes the match depend on where
3762 Vim starts searching for the pattern. You
3763 need to make sure syncing takes care of this.
3764
3765 Example (match a character constant): >
3766 :syntax match Character /'.'/hs=s+1,he=e-1
3767<
3768
3769DEFINING REGIONS *:syn-region* *:syn-start* *:syn-skip* *:syn-end*
3770 *E398* *E399*
3771:sy[ntax] region {group-name} [{options}]
3772 [matchgroup={group-name}]
3773 [keepend]
3774 [extend]
3775 [excludenl]
3776 start={start_pattern} ..
3777 [skip={skip_pattern}]
3778 end={end_pattern} ..
3779 [{options}]
3780
3781 This defines one region. It may span several lines.
3782
3783 {group-name} A syntax group name such as "Comment".
3784 [{options}] See |:syn-arguments| below.
3785 [matchgroup={group-name}] The syntax group to use for the following
3786 start or end pattern matches only. Not used
3787 for the text in between the matched start and
3788 end patterns. Use NONE to reset to not using
3789 a different group for the start or end match.
3790 See |:syn-matchgroup|.
3791 keepend Don't allow contained matches to go past a
3792 match with the end pattern. See
3793 |:syn-keepend|.
3794 extend Override a "keepend" for an item this region
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003795 is contained in. See |:syn-extend|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003796 excludenl Don't make a pattern with the end-of-line "$"
3797 extend a containing match or item. Only
3798 useful for end patterns. Must be given before
3799 the patterns it applies to. |:syn-excludenl|
3800 start={start_pattern} The search pattern that defines the start of
3801 the region. See |:syn-pattern| below.
3802 skip={skip_pattern} The search pattern that defines text inside
3803 the region where not to look for the end
3804 pattern. See |:syn-pattern| below.
3805 end={end_pattern} The search pattern that defines the end of
3806 the region. See |:syn-pattern| below.
3807
3808 Example: >
3809 :syntax region String start=+"+ skip=+\\"+ end=+"+
3810<
3811 The start/skip/end patterns and the options can be given in any order.
3812 There can be zero or one skip pattern. There must be one or more
3813 start and end patterns. This means that you can omit the skip
3814 pattern, but you must give at least one start and one end pattern. It
3815 is allowed to have white space before and after the equal sign
3816 (although it mostly looks better without white space).
3817
3818 When more than one start pattern is given, a match with one of these
3819 is sufficient. This means there is an OR relation between the start
3820 patterns. The last one that matches is used. The same is true for
3821 the end patterns.
3822
3823 The search for the end pattern starts right after the start pattern.
3824 Offsets are not used for this. This implies that the match for the
3825 end pattern will never overlap with the start pattern.
3826
3827 The skip and end pattern can match across line breaks, but since the
3828 search for the pattern can start in any line it often does not do what
3829 you want. The skip pattern doesn't avoid a match of an end pattern in
3830 the next line. Use single-line patterns to avoid trouble.
3831
3832 Note: The decision to start a region is only based on a matching start
3833 pattern. There is no check for a matching end pattern. This does NOT
3834 work: >
3835 :syn region First start="(" end=":"
3836 :syn region Second start="(" end=";"
3837< The Second always matches before the First (last defined pattern has
3838 higher priority). The Second region then continues until the next
3839 ';', no matter if there is a ':' before it. Using a match does work: >
3840 :syn match First "(\_.\{-}:"
3841 :syn match Second "(\_.\{-};"
3842< This pattern matches any character or line break with "\_." and
3843 repeats that with "\{-}" (repeat as few as possible).
3844
3845 *:syn-keepend*
3846 By default, a contained match can obscure a match for the end pattern.
3847 This is useful for nesting. For example, a region that starts with
3848 "{" and ends with "}", can contain another region. An encountered "}"
3849 will then end the contained region, but not the outer region:
3850 { starts outer "{}" region
3851 { starts contained "{}" region
3852 } ends contained "{}" region
3853 } ends outer "{} region
3854 If you don't want this, the "keepend" argument will make the matching
3855 of an end pattern of the outer region also end any contained item.
3856 This makes it impossible to nest the same region, but allows for
3857 contained items to highlight parts of the end pattern, without causing
3858 that to skip the match with the end pattern. Example: >
3859 :syn match vimComment +"[^"]\+$+
3860 :syn region vimCommand start="set" end="$" contains=vimComment keepend
3861< The "keepend" makes the vimCommand always end at the end of the line,
3862 even though the contained vimComment includes a match with the <EOL>.
3863
3864 When "keepend" is not used, a match with an end pattern is retried
3865 after each contained match. When "keepend" is included, the first
3866 encountered match with an end pattern is used, truncating any
3867 contained matches.
3868 *:syn-extend*
3869 The "keepend" behavior can be changed by using the "extend" argument.
3870 When an item with "extend" is contained in an item that uses
3871 "keepend", the "keepend" is ignored and the containing region will be
3872 extended.
3873 This can be used to have some contained items extend a region while
3874 others don't. Example: >
3875
3876 :syn region htmlRef start=+<a>+ end=+</a>+ keepend contains=htmlItem,htmlScript
3877 :syn match htmlItem +<[^>]*>+ contained
3878 :syn region htmlScript start=+<script+ end=+</script[^>]*>+ contained extend
3879
3880< Here the htmlItem item does not make the htmlRef item continue
3881 further, it is only used to highlight the <> items. The htmlScript
3882 item does extend the htmlRef item.
3883
3884 Another example: >
3885 :syn region xmlFold start="<a>" end="</a>" fold transparent keepend extend
3886< This defines a region with "keepend", so that its end cannot be
3887 changed by contained items, like when the "</a>" is matched to
3888 highlight it differently. But when the xmlFold region is nested (it
3889 includes itself), the "extend" applies, so that the "</a>" of a nested
3890 region only ends that region, and not the one it is contained in.
3891
3892 *:syn-excludenl*
3893 When a pattern for a match or end pattern of a region includes a '$'
3894 to match the end-of-line, it will make a region item that it is
3895 contained in continue on the next line. For example, a match with
3896 "\\$" (backslash at the end of the line) can make a region continue
3897 that would normally stop at the end of the line. This is the default
3898 behavior. If this is not wanted, there are two ways to avoid it:
3899 1. Use "keepend" for the containing item. This will keep all
3900 contained matches from extending the match or region. It can be
3901 used when all contained items must not extend the containing item.
3902 2. Use "excludenl" in the contained item. This will keep that match
3903 from extending the containing match or region. It can be used if
3904 only some contained items must not extend the containing item.
3905 "excludenl" must be given before the pattern it applies to.
3906
3907 *:syn-matchgroup*
3908 "matchgroup" can be used to highlight the start and/or end pattern
3909 differently than the body of the region. Example: >
3910 :syntax region String matchgroup=Quote start=+"+ skip=+\\"+ end=+"+
3911< This will highlight the quotes with the "Quote" group, and the text in
3912 between with the "String" group.
3913 The "matchgroup" is used for all start and end patterns that follow,
3914 until the next "matchgroup". Use "matchgroup=NONE" to go back to not
3915 using a matchgroup.
3916
3917 In a start or end pattern that is highlighted with "matchgroup" the
3918 contained items of the region are not used. This can be used to avoid
3919 that a contained item matches in the start or end pattern match. When
3920 using "transparent", this does not apply to a start or end pattern
3921 match that is highlighted with "matchgroup".
3922
3923 Here is an example, which highlights three levels of parentheses in
3924 different colors: >
3925 :sy region par1 matchgroup=par1 start=/(/ end=/)/ contains=par2
3926 :sy region par2 matchgroup=par2 start=/(/ end=/)/ contains=par3 contained
3927 :sy region par3 matchgroup=par3 start=/(/ end=/)/ contains=par1 contained
3928 :hi par1 ctermfg=red guifg=red
3929 :hi par2 ctermfg=blue guifg=blue
3930 :hi par3 ctermfg=darkgreen guifg=darkgreen
Bram Moolenaaradc21822011-04-01 18:03:16 +02003931<
3932 *E849*
3933The maximum number of syntax groups is 19999.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003934
3935==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +010039367. :syntax arguments *:syn-arguments*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003937
3938The :syntax commands that define syntax items take a number of arguments.
3939The common ones are explained here. The arguments may be given in any order
3940and may be mixed with patterns.
3941
3942Not all commands accept all arguments. This table shows which arguments
3943can not be used for all commands:
Bram Moolenaar09092152010-08-08 16:38:42 +02003944 *E395*
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02003945 contains oneline fold display extend concealends~
3946:syntax keyword - - - - - -
3947:syntax match yes - yes yes yes -
3948:syntax region yes yes yes yes yes yes
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003949
3950These arguments can be used for all three commands:
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02003951 conceal
3952 cchar
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003953 contained
3954 containedin
3955 nextgroup
3956 transparent
3957 skipwhite
3958 skipnl
3959 skipempty
3960
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02003961conceal *conceal* *:syn-conceal*
3962
3963When the "conceal" argument is given, the item is marked as concealable.
Bram Moolenaar370df582010-06-22 05:16:38 +02003964Whether or not it is actually concealed depends on the value of the
Bram Moolenaarf5963f72010-07-23 22:10:27 +02003965'conceallevel' option. The 'concealcursor' option is used to decide whether
3966concealable items in the current line are displayed unconcealed to be able to
3967edit the line.
Bram Moolenaardc1f1642016-08-16 18:33:43 +02003968Another way to conceal text is with |matchadd()|.
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02003969
3970concealends *:syn-concealends*
3971
3972When the "concealends" argument is given, the start and end matches of
3973the region, but not the contents of the region, are marked as concealable.
3974Whether or not they are actually concealed depends on the setting on the
3975'conceallevel' option. The ends of a region can only be concealed separately
3976in this way when they have their own highlighting via "matchgroup"
3977
3978cchar *:syn-cchar*
Bram Moolenaard58e9292011-02-09 17:07:58 +01003979 *E844*
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02003980The "cchar" argument defines the character shown in place of the item
3981when it is concealed (setting "cchar" only makes sense when the conceal
3982argument is given.) If "cchar" is not set then the default conceal
Bram Moolenaard58e9292011-02-09 17:07:58 +01003983character defined in the 'listchars' option is used. The character cannot be
3984a control character such as Tab. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02003985 :syntax match Entity "&amp;" conceal cchar=&
Bram Moolenaar9028b102010-07-11 16:58:51 +02003986See |hl-Conceal| for highlighting.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003987
3988contained *:syn-contained*
3989
3990When the "contained" argument is given, this item will not be recognized at
3991the top level, but only when it is mentioned in the "contains" field of
3992another match. Example: >
3993 :syntax keyword Todo TODO contained
3994 :syntax match Comment "//.*" contains=Todo
3995
3996
3997display *:syn-display*
3998
3999If the "display" argument is given, this item will be skipped when the
4000detected highlighting will not be displayed. This will speed up highlighting,
4001by skipping this item when only finding the syntax state for the text that is
4002to be displayed.
4003
4004Generally, you can use "display" for match and region items that meet these
4005conditions:
4006- The item does not continue past the end of a line. Example for C: A region
4007 for a "/*" comment can't contain "display", because it continues on the next
4008 line.
4009- The item does not contain items that continue past the end of the line or
4010 make it continue on the next line.
4011- The item does not change the size of any item it is contained in. Example
4012 for C: A match with "\\$" in a preprocessor match can't have "display",
4013 because it may make that preprocessor match shorter.
4014- The item does not allow other items to match that didn't match otherwise,
4015 and that item may extend the match too far. Example for C: A match for a
4016 "//" comment can't use "display", because a "/*" inside that comment would
4017 match then and start a comment which extends past the end of the line.
4018
4019Examples, for the C language, where "display" can be used:
4020- match with a number
4021- match with a label
4022
4023
4024transparent *:syn-transparent*
4025
4026If the "transparent" argument is given, this item will not be highlighted
4027itself, but will take the highlighting of the item it is contained in. This
4028is useful for syntax items that don't need any highlighting but are used
4029only to skip over a part of the text.
4030
4031The "contains=" argument is also inherited from the item it is contained in,
4032unless a "contains" argument is given for the transparent item itself. To
4033avoid that unwanted items are contained, use "contains=NONE". Example, which
4034highlights words in strings, but makes an exception for "vim": >
4035 :syn match myString /'[^']*'/ contains=myWord,myVim
4036 :syn match myWord /\<[a-z]*\>/ contained
4037 :syn match myVim /\<vim\>/ transparent contained contains=NONE
4038 :hi link myString String
4039 :hi link myWord Comment
4040Since the "myVim" match comes after "myWord" it is the preferred match (last
4041match in the same position overrules an earlier one). The "transparent"
4042argument makes the "myVim" match use the same highlighting as "myString". But
4043it does not contain anything. If the "contains=NONE" argument would be left
4044out, then "myVim" would use the contains argument from myString and allow
4045"myWord" to be contained, which will be highlighted as a Constant. This
4046happens because a contained match doesn't match inside itself in the same
4047position, thus the "myVim" match doesn't overrule the "myWord" match here.
4048
4049When you look at the colored text, it is like looking at layers of contained
4050items. The contained item is on top of the item it is contained in, thus you
4051see the contained item. When a contained item is transparent, you can look
4052through, thus you see the item it is contained in. In a picture:
4053
4054 look from here
4055
4056 | | | | | |
4057 V V V V V V
4058
4059 xxxx yyy more contained items
4060 .................... contained item (transparent)
4061 ============================= first item
4062
4063The 'x', 'y' and '=' represent a highlighted syntax item. The '.' represent a
4064transparent group.
4065
4066What you see is:
4067
4068 =======xxxx=======yyy========
4069
4070Thus you look through the transparent "....".
4071
4072
4073oneline *:syn-oneline*
4074
4075The "oneline" argument indicates that the region does not cross a line
4076boundary. It must match completely in the current line. However, when the
4077region has a contained item that does cross a line boundary, it continues on
4078the next line anyway. A contained item can be used to recognize a line
4079continuation pattern. But the "end" pattern must still match in the first
4080line, otherwise the region doesn't even start.
4081
4082When the start pattern includes a "\n" to match an end-of-line, the end
4083pattern must be found in the same line as where the start pattern ends. The
4084end pattern may also include an end-of-line. Thus the "oneline" argument
4085means that the end of the start pattern and the start of the end pattern must
4086be within one line. This can't be changed by a skip pattern that matches a
4087line break.
4088
4089
4090fold *:syn-fold*
4091
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00004092The "fold" argument makes the fold level increase by one for this item.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004093Example: >
4094 :syn region myFold start="{" end="}" transparent fold
4095 :syn sync fromstart
4096 :set foldmethod=syntax
4097This will make each {} block form one fold.
4098
4099The fold will start on the line where the item starts, and end where the item
4100ends. If the start and end are within the same line, there is no fold.
4101The 'foldnestmax' option limits the nesting of syntax folds.
4102{not available when Vim was compiled without |+folding| feature}
4103
4104
4105 *:syn-contains* *E405* *E406* *E407* *E408* *E409*
Bram Moolenaar3a991dd2014-10-02 01:41:41 +02004106contains={group-name},..
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004107
4108The "contains" argument is followed by a list of syntax group names. These
4109groups will be allowed to begin inside the item (they may extend past the
4110containing group's end). This allows for recursive nesting of matches and
4111regions. If there is no "contains" argument, no groups will be contained in
4112this item. The group names do not need to be defined before they can be used
4113here.
4114
4115contains=ALL
4116 If the only item in the contains list is "ALL", then all
4117 groups will be accepted inside the item.
4118
4119contains=ALLBUT,{group-name},..
4120 If the first item in the contains list is "ALLBUT", then all
4121 groups will be accepted inside the item, except the ones that
4122 are listed. Example: >
4123 :syntax region Block start="{" end="}" ... contains=ALLBUT,Function
4124
4125contains=TOP
4126 If the first item in the contains list is "TOP", then all
4127 groups will be accepted that don't have the "contained"
4128 argument.
4129contains=TOP,{group-name},..
4130 Like "TOP", but excluding the groups that are listed.
4131
4132contains=CONTAINED
4133 If the first item in the contains list is "CONTAINED", then
4134 all groups will be accepted that have the "contained"
4135 argument.
4136contains=CONTAINED,{group-name},..
4137 Like "CONTAINED", but excluding the groups that are
4138 listed.
4139
4140
4141The {group-name} in the "contains" list can be a pattern. All group names
4142that match the pattern will be included (or excluded, if "ALLBUT" is used).
4143The pattern cannot contain white space or a ','. Example: >
4144 ... contains=Comment.*,Keyw[0-3]
4145The matching will be done at moment the syntax command is executed. Groups
4146that are defined later will not be matched. Also, if the current syntax
4147command defines a new group, it is not matched. Be careful: When putting
4148syntax commands in a file you can't rely on groups NOT being defined, because
4149the file may have been sourced before, and ":syn clear" doesn't remove the
4150group names.
4151
4152The contained groups will also match in the start and end patterns of a
4153region. If this is not wanted, the "matchgroup" argument can be used
4154|:syn-matchgroup|. The "ms=" and "me=" offsets can be used to change the
4155region where contained items do match. Note that this may also limit the
4156area that is highlighted
4157
4158
Bram Moolenaar3a991dd2014-10-02 01:41:41 +02004159containedin={group-name}... *:syn-containedin*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004160
4161The "containedin" argument is followed by a list of syntax group names. The
4162item will be allowed to begin inside these groups. This works as if the
4163containing item has a "contains=" argument that includes this item.
4164
Bram Moolenaar3a991dd2014-10-02 01:41:41 +02004165The {group-name}... can be used just like for "contains", as explained above.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004166
4167This is useful when adding a syntax item afterwards. An item can be told to
4168be included inside an already existing item, without changing the definition
4169of that item. For example, to highlight a word in a C comment after loading
4170the C syntax: >
4171 :syn keyword myword HELP containedin=cComment contained
4172Note that "contained" is also used, to avoid that the item matches at the top
4173level.
4174
4175Matches for "containedin" are added to the other places where the item can
4176appear. A "contains" argument may also be added as usual. Don't forget that
4177keywords never contain another item, thus adding them to "containedin" won't
4178work.
4179
4180
Bram Moolenaar3a991dd2014-10-02 01:41:41 +02004181nextgroup={group-name},.. *:syn-nextgroup*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004182
4183The "nextgroup" argument is followed by a list of syntax group names,
4184separated by commas (just like with "contains", so you can also use patterns).
4185
4186If the "nextgroup" argument is given, the mentioned syntax groups will be
4187tried for a match, after the match or region ends. If none of the groups have
4188a match, highlighting continues normally. If there is a match, this group
4189will be used, even when it is not mentioned in the "contains" field of the
4190current group. This is like giving the mentioned group priority over all
4191other groups. Example: >
4192 :syntax match ccFoobar "Foo.\{-}Bar" contains=ccFoo
4193 :syntax match ccFoo "Foo" contained nextgroup=ccFiller
4194 :syntax region ccFiller start="." matchgroup=ccBar end="Bar" contained
4195
4196This will highlight "Foo" and "Bar" differently, and only when there is a
4197"Bar" after "Foo". In the text line below, "f" shows where ccFoo is used for
4198highlighting, and "bbb" where ccBar is used. >
4199
4200 Foo asdfasd Bar asdf Foo asdf Bar asdf
4201 fff bbb fff bbb
4202
4203Note the use of ".\{-}" to skip as little as possible until the next Bar.
4204when ".*" would be used, the "asdf" in between "Bar" and "Foo" would be
4205highlighted according to the "ccFoobar" group, because the ccFooBar match
4206would include the first "Foo" and the last "Bar" in the line (see |pattern|).
4207
4208
4209skipwhite *:syn-skipwhite*
4210skipnl *:syn-skipnl*
4211skipempty *:syn-skipempty*
4212
4213These arguments are only used in combination with "nextgroup". They can be
4214used to allow the next group to match after skipping some text:
Bram Moolenaardd2a0d82007-05-12 15:07:00 +00004215 skipwhite skip over space and tab characters
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004216 skipnl skip over the end of a line
4217 skipempty skip over empty lines (implies a "skipnl")
4218
4219When "skipwhite" is present, the white space is only skipped if there is no
4220next group that matches the white space.
4221
4222When "skipnl" is present, the match with nextgroup may be found in the next
4223line. This only happens when the current item ends at the end of the current
4224line! When "skipnl" is not present, the nextgroup will only be found after
4225the current item in the same line.
4226
4227When skipping text while looking for a next group, the matches for other
4228groups are ignored. Only when no next group matches, other items are tried
4229for a match again. This means that matching a next group and skipping white
4230space and <EOL>s has a higher priority than other items.
4231
4232Example: >
4233 :syn match ifstart "\<if.*" nextgroup=ifline skipwhite skipempty
4234 :syn match ifline "[^ \t].*" nextgroup=ifline skipwhite skipempty contained
4235 :syn match ifline "endif" contained
4236Note that the "[^ \t].*" match matches all non-white text. Thus it would also
4237match "endif". Therefore the "endif" match is put last, so that it takes
4238precedence.
4239Note that this example doesn't work for nested "if"s. You need to add
4240"contains" arguments to make that work (omitted for simplicity of the
4241example).
4242
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02004243IMPLICIT CONCEAL *:syn-conceal-implicit*
4244
4245:sy[ntax] conceal [on|off]
4246 This defines if the following ":syntax" commands will define keywords,
4247 matches or regions with the "conceal" flag set. After ":syn conceal
4248 on", all subsequent ":syn keyword", ":syn match" or ":syn region"
4249 defined will have the "conceal" flag set implicitly. ":syn conceal
4250 off" returns to the normal state where the "conceal" flag must be
4251 given explicitly.
4252
Bram Moolenaar690afe12017-01-28 18:34:47 +01004253:sy[ntax] conceal
4254 Show either "syntax conceal on" or "syntax conceal off" (translated).
4255
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004256==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +010042578. Syntax patterns *:syn-pattern* *E401* *E402*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004258
4259In the syntax commands, a pattern must be surrounded by two identical
4260characters. This is like it works for the ":s" command. The most common to
4261use is the double quote. But if the pattern contains a double quote, you can
4262use another character that is not used in the pattern. Examples: >
4263 :syntax region Comment start="/\*" end="\*/"
4264 :syntax region String start=+"+ end=+"+ skip=+\\"+
4265
4266See |pattern| for the explanation of what a pattern is. Syntax patterns are
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00004267always interpreted like the 'magic' option is set, no matter what the actual
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004268value of 'magic' is. And the patterns are interpreted like the 'l' flag is
4269not included in 'cpoptions'. This was done to make syntax files portable and
4270independent of 'compatible' and 'magic' settings.
4271
4272Try to avoid patterns that can match an empty string, such as "[a-z]*".
4273This slows down the highlighting a lot, because it matches everywhere.
4274
4275 *:syn-pattern-offset*
4276The pattern can be followed by a character offset. This can be used to
4277change the highlighted part, and to change the text area included in the
4278match or region (which only matters when trying to match other items). Both
4279are relative to the matched pattern. The character offset for a skip
4280pattern can be used to tell where to continue looking for an end pattern.
4281
4282The offset takes the form of "{what}={offset}"
4283The {what} can be one of seven strings:
4284
4285ms Match Start offset for the start of the matched text
4286me Match End offset for the end of the matched text
4287hs Highlight Start offset for where the highlighting starts
4288he Highlight End offset for where the highlighting ends
4289rs Region Start offset for where the body of a region starts
4290re Region End offset for where the body of a region ends
4291lc Leading Context offset past "leading context" of pattern
4292
4293The {offset} can be:
4294
4295s start of the matched pattern
4296s+{nr} start of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the right
4297s-{nr} start of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the left
4298e end of the matched pattern
4299e+{nr} end of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the right
4300e-{nr} end of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the left
Bram Moolenaarac7bd632013-03-19 11:35:58 +01004301{nr} (for "lc" only): start matching {nr} chars right of the start
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004302
4303Examples: "ms=s+1", "hs=e-2", "lc=3".
4304
4305Although all offsets are accepted after any pattern, they are not always
4306meaningful. This table shows which offsets are actually used:
4307
4308 ms me hs he rs re lc ~
4309match item yes yes yes yes - - yes
4310region item start yes - yes - yes - yes
4311region item skip - yes - - - - yes
4312region item end - yes - yes - yes yes
4313
4314Offsets can be concatenated, with a ',' in between. Example: >
4315 :syn match String /"[^"]*"/hs=s+1,he=e-1
4316<
4317 some "string" text
4318 ^^^^^^ highlighted
4319
4320Notes:
4321- There must be no white space between the pattern and the character
4322 offset(s).
4323- The highlighted area will never be outside of the matched text.
4324- A negative offset for an end pattern may not always work, because the end
4325 pattern may be detected when the highlighting should already have stopped.
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01004326- Before Vim 7.2 the offsets were counted in bytes instead of characters.
4327 This didn't work well for multi-byte characters, so it was changed with the
4328 Vim 7.2 release.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004329- The start of a match cannot be in a line other than where the pattern
4330 matched. This doesn't work: "a\nb"ms=e. You can make the highlighting
4331 start in another line, this does work: "a\nb"hs=e.
4332
4333Example (match a comment but don't highlight the /* and */): >
4334 :syntax region Comment start="/\*"hs=e+1 end="\*/"he=s-1
4335<
4336 /* this is a comment */
4337 ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ highlighted
4338
4339A more complicated Example: >
4340 :syn region Exa matchgroup=Foo start="foo"hs=s+2,rs=e+2 matchgroup=Bar end="bar"me=e-1,he=e-1,re=s-1
4341<
4342 abcfoostringbarabc
4343 mmmmmmmmmmm match
Bram Moolenaar4770d092006-01-12 23:22:24 +00004344 sssrrreee highlight start/region/end ("Foo", "Exa" and "Bar")
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004345
4346Leading context *:syn-lc* *:syn-leading* *:syn-context*
4347
4348Note: This is an obsolete feature, only included for backwards compatibility
4349with previous Vim versions. It's now recommended to use the |/\@<=| construct
4350in the pattern.
4351
4352The "lc" offset specifies leading context -- a part of the pattern that must
4353be present, but is not considered part of the match. An offset of "lc=n" will
4354cause Vim to step back n columns before attempting the pattern match, allowing
4355characters which have already been matched in previous patterns to also be
4356used as leading context for this match. This can be used, for instance, to
4357specify that an "escaping" character must not precede the match: >
4358
4359 :syn match ZNoBackslash "[^\\]z"ms=s+1
4360 :syn match WNoBackslash "[^\\]w"lc=1
4361 :syn match Underline "_\+"
4362<
4363 ___zzzz ___wwww
4364 ^^^ ^^^ matches Underline
4365 ^ ^ matches ZNoBackslash
4366 ^^^^ matches WNoBackslash
4367
4368The "ms" offset is automatically set to the same value as the "lc" offset,
4369unless you set "ms" explicitly.
4370
4371
4372Multi-line patterns *:syn-multi-line*
4373
4374The patterns can include "\n" to match an end-of-line. Mostly this works as
4375expected, but there are a few exceptions.
4376
4377When using a start pattern with an offset, the start of the match is not
4378allowed to start in a following line. The highlighting can start in a
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01004379following line though. Using the "\zs" item also requires that the start of
4380the match doesn't move to another line.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004381
4382The skip pattern can include the "\n", but the search for an end pattern will
4383continue in the first character of the next line, also when that character is
4384matched by the skip pattern. This is because redrawing may start in any line
4385halfway a region and there is no check if the skip pattern started in a
4386previous line. For example, if the skip pattern is "a\nb" and an end pattern
4387is "b", the end pattern does match in the second line of this: >
4388 x x a
4389 b x x
4390Generally this means that the skip pattern should not match any characters
4391after the "\n".
4392
4393
4394External matches *:syn-ext-match*
4395
4396These extra regular expression items are available in region patterns:
4397
Bram Moolenaar203d04d2013-06-06 21:36:40 +02004398 */\z(* */\z(\)* *E50* *E52* *E879*
Bram Moolenaara3e6bc92013-01-30 14:18:00 +01004399 \z(\) Marks the sub-expression as "external", meaning that it can be
4400 accessed from another pattern match. Currently only usable in
4401 defining a syntax region start pattern.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004402
4403 */\z1* */\z2* */\z3* */\z4* */\z5*
4404 \z1 ... \z9 */\z6* */\z7* */\z8* */\z9* *E66* *E67*
4405 Matches the same string that was matched by the corresponding
4406 sub-expression in a previous start pattern match.
4407
4408Sometimes the start and end patterns of a region need to share a common
4409sub-expression. A common example is the "here" document in Perl and many Unix
4410shells. This effect can be achieved with the "\z" special regular expression
4411items, which marks a sub-expression as "external", in the sense that it can be
4412referenced from outside the pattern in which it is defined. The here-document
4413example, for instance, can be done like this: >
4414 :syn region hereDoc start="<<\z(\I\i*\)" end="^\z1$"
4415
4416As can be seen here, the \z actually does double duty. In the start pattern,
4417it marks the "\(\I\i*\)" sub-expression as external; in the end pattern, it
Bram Moolenaarb4ff5182015-11-10 21:15:48 +01004418changes the \z1 back-reference into an external reference referring to the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004419first external sub-expression in the start pattern. External references can
4420also be used in skip patterns: >
4421 :syn region foo start="start \(\I\i*\)" skip="not end \z1" end="end \z1"
4422
4423Note that normal and external sub-expressions are completely orthogonal and
4424indexed separately; for instance, if the pattern "\z(..\)\(..\)" is applied
4425to the string "aabb", then \1 will refer to "bb" and \z1 will refer to "aa".
4426Note also that external sub-expressions cannot be accessed as back-references
4427within the same pattern like normal sub-expressions. If you want to use one
4428sub-expression as both a normal and an external sub-expression, you can nest
4429the two, as in "\(\z(...\)\)".
4430
4431Note that only matches within a single line can be used. Multi-line matches
4432cannot be referred to.
4433
4434==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +010044359. Syntax clusters *:syn-cluster* *E400*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004436
4437:sy[ntax] cluster {cluster-name} [contains={group-name}..]
4438 [add={group-name}..]
4439 [remove={group-name}..]
4440
4441This command allows you to cluster a list of syntax groups together under a
4442single name.
4443
4444 contains={group-name}..
4445 The cluster is set to the specified list of groups.
4446 add={group-name}..
4447 The specified groups are added to the cluster.
4448 remove={group-name}..
4449 The specified groups are removed from the cluster.
4450
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00004451A cluster so defined may be referred to in a contains=.., containedin=..,
4452nextgroup=.., add=.. or remove=.. list with a "@" prefix. You can also use
4453this notation to implicitly declare a cluster before specifying its contents.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004454
4455Example: >
4456 :syntax match Thing "# [^#]\+ #" contains=@ThingMembers
4457 :syntax cluster ThingMembers contains=ThingMember1,ThingMember2
4458
4459As the previous example suggests, modifications to a cluster are effectively
4460retroactive; the membership of the cluster is checked at the last minute, so
4461to speak: >
4462 :syntax keyword A aaa
4463 :syntax keyword B bbb
4464 :syntax cluster AandB contains=A
4465 :syntax match Stuff "( aaa bbb )" contains=@AandB
4466 :syntax cluster AandB add=B " now both keywords are matched in Stuff
4467
4468This also has implications for nested clusters: >
4469 :syntax keyword A aaa
4470 :syntax keyword B bbb
4471 :syntax cluster SmallGroup contains=B
4472 :syntax cluster BigGroup contains=A,@SmallGroup
4473 :syntax match Stuff "( aaa bbb )" contains=@BigGroup
4474 :syntax cluster BigGroup remove=B " no effect, since B isn't in BigGroup
4475 :syntax cluster SmallGroup remove=B " now bbb isn't matched within Stuff
Bram Moolenaaradc21822011-04-01 18:03:16 +02004476<
4477 *E848*
4478The maximum number of clusters is 9767.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004479
4480==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100448110. Including syntax files *:syn-include* *E397*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004482
4483It is often useful for one language's syntax file to include a syntax file for
4484a related language. Depending on the exact relationship, this can be done in
4485two different ways:
4486
4487 - If top-level syntax items in the included syntax file are to be
4488 allowed at the top level in the including syntax, you can simply use
4489 the |:runtime| command: >
4490
4491 " In cpp.vim:
4492 :runtime! syntax/c.vim
4493 :unlet b:current_syntax
4494
4495< - If top-level syntax items in the included syntax file are to be
4496 contained within a region in the including syntax, you can use the
4497 ":syntax include" command:
4498
4499:sy[ntax] include [@{grouplist-name}] {file-name}
4500
4501 All syntax items declared in the included file will have the
4502 "contained" flag added. In addition, if a group list is specified,
4503 all top-level syntax items in the included file will be added to
4504 that list. >
4505
4506 " In perl.vim:
4507 :syntax include @Pod <sfile>:p:h/pod.vim
4508 :syntax region perlPOD start="^=head" end="^=cut" contains=@Pod
4509<
4510 When {file-name} is an absolute path (starts with "/", "c:", "$VAR"
4511 or "<sfile>") that file is sourced. When it is a relative path
4512 (e.g., "syntax/pod.vim") the file is searched for in 'runtimepath'.
4513 All matching files are loaded. Using a relative path is
4514 recommended, because it allows a user to replace the included file
4515 with his own version, without replacing the file that does the ":syn
4516 include".
4517
Bram Moolenaaradc21822011-04-01 18:03:16 +02004518 *E847*
4519The maximum number of includes is 999.
4520
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004521==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100452211. Synchronizing *:syn-sync* *E403* *E404*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004523
4524Vim wants to be able to start redrawing in any position in the document. To
4525make this possible it needs to know the syntax state at the position where
4526redrawing starts.
4527
4528:sy[ntax] sync [ccomment [group-name] | minlines={N} | ...]
4529
4530There are four ways to synchronize:
45311. Always parse from the start of the file.
4532 |:syn-sync-first|
45332. Based on C-style comments. Vim understands how C-comments work and can
4534 figure out if the current line starts inside or outside a comment.
4535 |:syn-sync-second|
45363. Jumping back a certain number of lines and start parsing there.
4537 |:syn-sync-third|
45384. Searching backwards in the text for a pattern to sync on.
4539 |:syn-sync-fourth|
4540
4541 *:syn-sync-maxlines* *:syn-sync-minlines*
4542For the last three methods, the line range where the parsing can start is
4543limited by "minlines" and "maxlines".
4544
4545If the "minlines={N}" argument is given, the parsing always starts at least
4546that many lines backwards. This can be used if the parsing may take a few
4547lines before it's correct, or when it's not possible to use syncing.
4548
4549If the "maxlines={N}" argument is given, the number of lines that are searched
4550for a comment or syncing pattern is restricted to N lines backwards (after
4551adding "minlines"). This is useful if you have few things to sync on and a
4552slow machine. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar2b8388b2015-02-28 13:11:45 +01004553 :syntax sync maxlines=500 ccomment
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004554<
4555 *:syn-sync-linebreaks*
4556When using a pattern that matches multiple lines, a change in one line may
4557cause a pattern to no longer match in a previous line. This means has to
4558start above where the change was made. How many lines can be specified with
4559the "linebreaks" argument. For example, when a pattern may include one line
4560break use this: >
4561 :syntax sync linebreaks=1
4562The result is that redrawing always starts at least one line before where a
4563change was made. The default value for "linebreaks" is zero. Usually the
4564value for "minlines" is bigger than "linebreaks".
4565
4566
4567First syncing method: *:syn-sync-first*
4568>
4569 :syntax sync fromstart
4570
4571The file will be parsed from the start. This makes syntax highlighting
4572accurate, but can be slow for long files. Vim caches previously parsed text,
4573so that it's only slow when parsing the text for the first time. However,
Bram Moolenaarf1568ec2011-12-14 21:17:39 +01004574when making changes some part of the text needs to be parsed again (worst
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004575case: to the end of the file).
4576
4577Using "fromstart" is equivalent to using "minlines" with a very large number.
4578
4579
4580Second syncing method: *:syn-sync-second* *:syn-sync-ccomment*
4581
4582For the second method, only the "ccomment" argument needs to be given.
4583Example: >
4584 :syntax sync ccomment
4585
4586When Vim finds that the line where displaying starts is inside a C-style
4587comment, the last region syntax item with the group-name "Comment" will be
4588used. This requires that there is a region with the group-name "Comment"!
4589An alternate group name can be specified, for example: >
4590 :syntax sync ccomment javaComment
4591This means that the last item specified with "syn region javaComment" will be
4592used for the detected C comment region. This only works properly if that
4593region does have a start pattern "\/*" and an end pattern "*\/".
4594
4595The "maxlines" argument can be used to restrict the search to a number of
4596lines. The "minlines" argument can be used to at least start a number of
4597lines back (e.g., for when there is some construct that only takes a few
4598lines, but it hard to sync on).
4599
4600Note: Syncing on a C comment doesn't work properly when strings are used
4601that cross a line and contain a "*/". Since letting strings cross a line
4602is a bad programming habit (many compilers give a warning message), and the
4603chance of a "*/" appearing inside a comment is very small, this restriction
4604is hardly ever noticed.
4605
4606
4607Third syncing method: *:syn-sync-third*
4608
4609For the third method, only the "minlines={N}" argument needs to be given.
4610Vim will subtract {N} from the line number and start parsing there. This
4611means {N} extra lines need to be parsed, which makes this method a bit slower.
4612Example: >
4613 :syntax sync minlines=50
4614
4615"lines" is equivalent to "minlines" (used by older versions).
4616
4617
4618Fourth syncing method: *:syn-sync-fourth*
4619
4620The idea is to synchronize on the end of a few specific regions, called a
4621sync pattern. Only regions can cross lines, so when we find the end of some
4622region, we might be able to know in which syntax item we are. The search
4623starts in the line just above the one where redrawing starts. From there
4624the search continues backwards in the file.
4625
4626This works just like the non-syncing syntax items. You can use contained
4627matches, nextgroup, etc. But there are a few differences:
4628- Keywords cannot be used.
4629- The syntax items with the "sync" keyword form a completely separated group
4630 of syntax items. You can't mix syncing groups and non-syncing groups.
4631- The matching works backwards in the buffer (line by line), instead of
4632 forwards.
4633- A line continuation pattern can be given. It is used to decide which group
4634 of lines need to be searched like they were one line. This means that the
4635 search for a match with the specified items starts in the first of the
4636 consecutive that contain the continuation pattern.
4637- When using "nextgroup" or "contains", this only works within one line (or
4638 group of continued lines).
4639- When using a region, it must start and end in the same line (or group of
4640 continued lines). Otherwise the end is assumed to be at the end of the
4641 line (or group of continued lines).
4642- When a match with a sync pattern is found, the rest of the line (or group of
4643 continued lines) is searched for another match. The last match is used.
4644 This is used when a line can contain both the start end the end of a region
4645 (e.g., in a C-comment like /* this */, the last "*/" is used).
4646
4647There are two ways how a match with a sync pattern can be used:
46481. Parsing for highlighting starts where redrawing starts (and where the
4649 search for the sync pattern started). The syntax group that is expected
4650 to be valid there must be specified. This works well when the regions
4651 that cross lines cannot contain other regions.
46522. Parsing for highlighting continues just after the match. The syntax group
4653 that is expected to be present just after the match must be specified.
4654 This can be used when the previous method doesn't work well. It's much
4655 slower, because more text needs to be parsed.
4656Both types of sync patterns can be used at the same time.
4657
4658Besides the sync patterns, other matches and regions can be specified, to
4659avoid finding unwanted matches.
4660
4661[The reason that the sync patterns are given separately, is that mostly the
4662search for the sync point can be much simpler than figuring out the
4663highlighting. The reduced number of patterns means it will go (much)
4664faster.]
4665
4666 *syn-sync-grouphere* *E393* *E394*
4667 :syntax sync match {sync-group-name} grouphere {group-name} "pattern" ..
4668
4669 Define a match that is used for syncing. {group-name} is the
4670 name of a syntax group that follows just after the match. Parsing
4671 of the text for highlighting starts just after the match. A region
4672 must exist for this {group-name}. The first one defined will be used.
4673 "NONE" can be used for when there is no syntax group after the match.
4674
4675 *syn-sync-groupthere*
4676 :syntax sync match {sync-group-name} groupthere {group-name} "pattern" ..
4677
4678 Like "grouphere", but {group-name} is the name of a syntax group that
4679 is to be used at the start of the line where searching for the sync
4680 point started. The text between the match and the start of the sync
4681 pattern searching is assumed not to change the syntax highlighting.
4682 For example, in C you could search backwards for "/*" and "*/". If
4683 "/*" is found first, you know that you are inside a comment, so the
4684 "groupthere" is "cComment". If "*/" is found first, you know that you
4685 are not in a comment, so the "groupthere" is "NONE". (in practice
4686 it's a bit more complicated, because the "/*" and "*/" could appear
4687 inside a string. That's left as an exercise to the reader...).
4688
4689 :syntax sync match ..
4690 :syntax sync region ..
4691
4692 Without a "groupthere" argument. Define a region or match that is
4693 skipped while searching for a sync point.
4694
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +00004695 *syn-sync-linecont*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004696 :syntax sync linecont {pattern}
4697
4698 When {pattern} matches in a line, it is considered to continue in
4699 the next line. This means that the search for a sync point will
4700 consider the lines to be concatenated.
4701
4702If the "maxlines={N}" argument is given too, the number of lines that are
4703searched for a match is restricted to N. This is useful if you have very
4704few things to sync on and a slow machine. Example: >
4705 :syntax sync maxlines=100
4706
4707You can clear all sync settings with: >
4708 :syntax sync clear
4709
4710You can clear specific sync patterns with: >
4711 :syntax sync clear {sync-group-name} ..
4712
4713==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100471412. Listing syntax items *:syntax* *:sy* *:syn* *:syn-list*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004715
Bram Moolenaar482aaeb2005-09-29 18:26:07 +00004716This command lists all the syntax items: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004717
4718 :sy[ntax] [list]
4719
4720To show the syntax items for one syntax group: >
4721
4722 :sy[ntax] list {group-name}
4723
Bram Moolenaar24ea3ba2010-09-19 19:01:21 +02004724To list the syntax groups in one cluster: *E392* >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004725
4726 :sy[ntax] list @{cluster-name}
4727
4728See above for other arguments for the ":syntax" command.
4729
4730Note that the ":syntax" command can be abbreviated to ":sy", although ":syn"
4731is mostly used, because it looks better.
4732
4733==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100473413. Highlight command *:highlight* *:hi* *E28* *E411* *E415*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004735
4736There are three types of highlight groups:
4737- The ones used for specific languages. For these the name starts with the
4738 name of the language. Many of these don't have any attributes, but are
4739 linked to a group of the second type.
4740- The ones used for all syntax languages.
4741- The ones used for the 'highlight' option.
4742 *hitest.vim*
4743You can see all the groups currently active with this command: >
4744 :so $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/hitest.vim
4745This will open a new window containing all highlight group names, displayed
4746in their own color.
4747
4748 *:colo* *:colorscheme* *E185*
Bram Moolenaar00a927d2010-05-14 23:24:24 +02004749:colo[rscheme] Output the name of the currently active color scheme.
4750 This is basically the same as >
4751 :echo g:colors_name
4752< In case g:colors_name has not been defined :colo will
4753 output "default". When compiled without the |+eval|
4754 feature it will output "unknown".
4755
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004756:colo[rscheme] {name} Load color scheme {name}. This searches 'runtimepath'
Bram Moolenaarbc488a72013-07-05 21:01:22 +02004757 for the file "colors/{name}.vim". The first one that
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004758 is found is loaded.
Bram Moolenaare18c0b32016-03-20 21:08:34 +01004759 Also searches all plugins in 'packpath', first below
4760 "start" and then under "opt".
4761
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01004762 Doesn't work recursively, thus you can't use
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004763 ":colorscheme" in a color scheme script.
Bram Moolenaarb4ada792016-10-30 21:55:26 +01004764
Bram Moolenaar723dd942019-04-04 13:11:03 +02004765 To customize a color scheme use another name, e.g.
Bram Moolenaarb4ada792016-10-30 21:55:26 +01004766 "~/.vim/colors/mine.vim", and use `:runtime` to load
Bram Moolenaar723dd942019-04-04 13:11:03 +02004767 the original color scheme: >
Bram Moolenaarb4ada792016-10-30 21:55:26 +01004768 runtime colors/evening.vim
4769 hi Statement ctermfg=Blue guifg=Blue
4770
Bram Moolenaar15142e22018-04-30 22:19:58 +02004771< Before the color scheme will be loaded the
4772 |ColorSchemePre| autocommand event is triggered.
4773 After the color scheme has been loaded the
Bram Moolenaarcfbc5ee2004-07-02 15:38:35 +00004774 |ColorScheme| autocommand event is triggered.
Bram Moolenaar723dd942019-04-04 13:11:03 +02004775 For info about writing a color scheme file: >
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00004776 :edit $VIMRUNTIME/colors/README.txt
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004777
4778:hi[ghlight] List all the current highlight groups that have
4779 attributes set.
4780
4781:hi[ghlight] {group-name}
4782 List one highlight group.
4783
4784:hi[ghlight] clear Reset all highlighting to the defaults. Removes all
4785 highlighting for groups added by the user!
4786 Uses the current value of 'background' to decide which
4787 default colors to use.
4788
4789:hi[ghlight] clear {group-name}
4790:hi[ghlight] {group-name} NONE
4791 Disable the highlighting for one highlight group. It
4792 is _not_ set back to the default colors.
4793
4794:hi[ghlight] [default] {group-name} {key}={arg} ..
4795 Add a highlight group, or change the highlighting for
4796 an existing group.
4797 See |highlight-args| for the {key}={arg} arguments.
4798 See |:highlight-default| for the optional [default]
4799 argument.
4800
4801Normally a highlight group is added once when starting up. This sets the
4802default values for the highlighting. After that, you can use additional
4803highlight commands to change the arguments that you want to set to non-default
4804values. The value "NONE" can be used to switch the value off or go back to
4805the default value.
4806
4807A simple way to change colors is with the |:colorscheme| command. This loads
4808a file with ":highlight" commands such as this: >
4809
4810 :hi Comment gui=bold
4811
4812Note that all settings that are not included remain the same, only the
4813specified field is used, and settings are merged with previous ones. So, the
4814result is like this single command has been used: >
4815 :hi Comment term=bold ctermfg=Cyan guifg=#80a0ff gui=bold
4816<
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +00004817 *:highlight-verbose*
Bram Moolenaar661b1822005-07-28 22:36:45 +00004818When listing a highlight group and 'verbose' is non-zero, the listing will
4819also tell where it was last set. Example: >
4820 :verbose hi Comment
4821< Comment xxx term=bold ctermfg=4 guifg=Blue ~
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +00004822 Last set from /home/mool/vim/vim7/runtime/syntax/syncolor.vim ~
Bram Moolenaar661b1822005-07-28 22:36:45 +00004823
Bram Moolenaar8aff23a2005-08-19 20:40:30 +00004824When ":hi clear" is used then the script where this command is used will be
4825mentioned for the default values. See |:verbose-cmd| for more information.
Bram Moolenaar661b1822005-07-28 22:36:45 +00004826
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004827 *highlight-args* *E416* *E417* *E423*
4828There are three types of terminals for highlighting:
4829term a normal terminal (vt100, xterm)
Bram Moolenaar5666fcd2019-12-26 14:35:26 +01004830cterm a color terminal (MS-Windows console, color-xterm, these have the "Co"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004831 termcap entry)
4832gui the GUI
4833
4834For each type the highlighting can be given. This makes it possible to use
4835the same syntax file on all terminals, and use the optimal highlighting.
4836
48371. highlight arguments for normal terminals
4838
Bram Moolenaar75c50c42005-06-04 22:06:24 +00004839 *bold* *underline* *undercurl*
4840 *inverse* *italic* *standout*
Bram Moolenaarcf4b00c2017-09-02 18:33:56 +02004841 *nocombine* *strikethrough*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004842term={attr-list} *attr-list* *highlight-term* *E418*
4843 attr-list is a comma separated list (without spaces) of the
4844 following items (in any order):
4845 bold
4846 underline
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +00004847 undercurl not always available
Bram Moolenaarcf4b00c2017-09-02 18:33:56 +02004848 strikethrough not always available
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004849 reverse
4850 inverse same as reverse
4851 italic
4852 standout
Bram Moolenaar0cd2a942017-08-12 15:12:30 +02004853 nocombine override attributes instead of combining them
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004854 NONE no attributes used (used to reset it)
4855
4856 Note that "bold" can be used here and by using a bold font. They
4857 have the same effect.
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +00004858 "undercurl" is a curly underline. When "undercurl" is not possible
Bram Moolenaarcf4b00c2017-09-02 18:33:56 +02004859 then "underline" is used. In general "undercurl" and "strikethrough"
4860 is only available in the GUI. The color is set with |highlight-guisp|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004861
4862start={term-list} *highlight-start* *E422*
4863stop={term-list} *term-list* *highlight-stop*
4864 These lists of terminal codes can be used to get
4865 non-standard attributes on a terminal.
4866
4867 The escape sequence specified with the "start" argument
4868 is written before the characters in the highlighted
4869 area. It can be anything that you want to send to the
4870 terminal to highlight this area. The escape sequence
4871 specified with the "stop" argument is written after the
4872 highlighted area. This should undo the "start" argument.
4873 Otherwise the screen will look messed up.
4874
4875 The {term-list} can have two forms:
4876
4877 1. A string with escape sequences.
4878 This is any string of characters, except that it can't start with
4879 "t_" and blanks are not allowed. The <> notation is recognized
4880 here, so you can use things like "<Esc>" and "<Space>". Example:
4881 start=<Esc>[27h;<Esc>[<Space>r;
4882
4883 2. A list of terminal codes.
4884 Each terminal code has the form "t_xx", where "xx" is the name of
4885 the termcap entry. The codes have to be separated with commas.
4886 White space is not allowed. Example:
4887 start=t_C1,t_BL
4888 The terminal codes must exist for this to work.
4889
4890
48912. highlight arguments for color terminals
4892
4893cterm={attr-list} *highlight-cterm*
4894 See above for the description of {attr-list} |attr-list|.
4895 The "cterm" argument is likely to be different from "term", when
4896 colors are used. For example, in a normal terminal comments could
4897 be underlined, in a color terminal they can be made Blue.
Bram Moolenaar68e65602019-05-26 21:33:31 +02004898 Note: Some terminals (e.g., DOS console) can't mix these attributes
4899 with coloring. To be portable, use only one of "cterm=" OR "ctermfg="
4900 OR "ctermbg=".
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004901
4902ctermfg={color-nr} *highlight-ctermfg* *E421*
4903ctermbg={color-nr} *highlight-ctermbg*
4904 The {color-nr} argument is a color number. Its range is zero to
4905 (not including) the number given by the termcap entry "Co".
4906 The actual color with this number depends on the type of terminal
4907 and its settings. Sometimes the color also depends on the settings of
4908 "cterm". For example, on some systems "cterm=bold ctermfg=3" gives
4909 another color, on others you just get color 3.
4910
4911 For an xterm this depends on your resources, and is a bit
4912 unpredictable. See your xterm documentation for the defaults. The
4913 colors for a color-xterm can be changed from the .Xdefaults file.
4914 Unfortunately this means that it's not possible to get the same colors
4915 for each user. See |xterm-color| for info about color xterms.
4916
Bram Moolenaar5666fcd2019-12-26 14:35:26 +01004917 The MS-Windows standard colors are fixed (in a console window), so
4918 these have been used for the names. But the meaning of color names in
4919 X11 are fixed, so these color settings have been used, to make the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004920 highlighting settings portable (complicated, isn't it?). The
4921 following names are recognized, with the color number used:
4922
4923 *cterm-colors*
4924 NR-16 NR-8 COLOR NAME ~
4925 0 0 Black
4926 1 4 DarkBlue
4927 2 2 DarkGreen
4928 3 6 DarkCyan
4929 4 1 DarkRed
4930 5 5 DarkMagenta
4931 6 3 Brown, DarkYellow
4932 7 7 LightGray, LightGrey, Gray, Grey
4933 8 0* DarkGray, DarkGrey
4934 9 4* Blue, LightBlue
4935 10 2* Green, LightGreen
4936 11 6* Cyan, LightCyan
4937 12 1* Red, LightRed
4938 13 5* Magenta, LightMagenta
4939 14 3* Yellow, LightYellow
4940 15 7* White
4941
4942 The number under "NR-16" is used for 16-color terminals ('t_Co'
4943 greater than or equal to 16). The number under "NR-8" is used for
4944 8-color terminals ('t_Co' less than 16). The '*' indicates that the
4945 bold attribute is set for ctermfg. In many 8-color terminals (e.g.,
4946 "linux"), this causes the bright colors to appear. This doesn't work
4947 for background colors! Without the '*' the bold attribute is removed.
4948 If you want to set the bold attribute in a different way, put a
4949 "cterm=" argument AFTER the "ctermfg=" or "ctermbg=" argument. Or use
4950 a number instead of a color name.
4951
4952 The case of the color names is ignored.
4953 Note that for 16 color ansi style terminals (including xterms), the
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00004954 numbers in the NR-8 column is used. Here '*' means 'add 8' so that Blue
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004955 is 12, DarkGray is 8 etc.
4956
4957 Note that for some color terminals these names may result in the wrong
4958 colors!
4959
Bram Moolenaar5837f1f2015-03-21 18:06:14 +01004960 You can also use "NONE" to remove the color.
4961
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004962 *:hi-normal-cterm*
4963 When setting the "ctermfg" or "ctermbg" colors for the Normal group,
4964 these will become the colors used for the non-highlighted text.
4965 Example: >
4966 :highlight Normal ctermfg=grey ctermbg=darkblue
4967< When setting the "ctermbg" color for the Normal group, the
Bram Moolenaar6aa8cea2017-06-05 14:44:35 +02004968 'background' option will be adjusted automatically, under the
4969 condition that the color is recognized and 'background' was not set
4970 explicitly. This causes the highlight groups that depend on
4971 'background' to change! This means you should set the colors for
4972 Normal first, before setting other colors.
Bram Moolenaar723dd942019-04-04 13:11:03 +02004973 When a color scheme is being used, changing 'background' causes it to
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004974 be reloaded, which may reset all colors (including Normal). First
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01004975 delete the "g:colors_name" variable when you don't want this.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004976
4977 When you have set "ctermfg" or "ctermbg" for the Normal group, Vim
4978 needs to reset the color when exiting. This is done with the "op"
4979 termcap entry |t_op|. If this doesn't work correctly, try setting the
4980 't_op' option in your .vimrc.
4981 *E419* *E420*
4982 When Vim knows the normal foreground and background colors, "fg" and
4983 "bg" can be used as color names. This only works after setting the
Bram Moolenaar5666fcd2019-12-26 14:35:26 +01004984 colors for the Normal group and for the MS-Windows console. Example,
4985 for reverse video: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004986 :highlight Visual ctermfg=bg ctermbg=fg
4987< Note that the colors are used that are valid at the moment this
4988 command are given. If the Normal group colors are changed later, the
4989 "fg" and "bg" colors will not be adjusted.
4990
4991
49923. highlight arguments for the GUI
4993
4994gui={attr-list} *highlight-gui*
4995 These give the attributes to use in the GUI mode.
4996 See |attr-list| for a description.
4997 Note that "bold" can be used here and by using a bold font. They
4998 have the same effect.
4999 Note that the attributes are ignored for the "Normal" group.
5000
5001font={font-name} *highlight-font*
5002 font-name is the name of a font, as it is used on the system Vim
5003 runs on. For X11 this is a complicated name, for example: >
5004 font=-misc-fixed-bold-r-normal--14-130-75-75-c-70-iso8859-1
5005<
5006 The font-name "NONE" can be used to revert to the default font.
5007 When setting the font for the "Normal" group, this becomes the default
5008 font (until the 'guifont' option is changed; the last one set is
5009 used).
5010 The following only works with Motif and Athena, not with other GUIs:
5011 When setting the font for the "Menu" group, the menus will be changed.
5012 When setting the font for the "Tooltip" group, the tooltips will be
5013 changed.
5014 All fonts used, except for Menu and Tooltip, should be of the same
5015 character size as the default font! Otherwise redrawing problems will
5016 occur.
Bram Moolenaar82af8712016-06-04 20:20:29 +02005017 To use a font name with an embedded space or other special character,
5018 put it in single quotes. The single quote cannot be used then.
5019 Example: >
5020 :hi comment font='Monospace 10'
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005021
5022guifg={color-name} *highlight-guifg*
5023guibg={color-name} *highlight-guibg*
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +00005024guisp={color-name} *highlight-guisp*
5025 These give the foreground (guifg), background (guibg) and special
Bram Moolenaarcf4b00c2017-09-02 18:33:56 +02005026 (guisp) color to use in the GUI. "guisp" is used for undercurl and
5027 strikethrough.
Bram Moolenaar7df351e2006-01-23 22:30:28 +00005028 There are a few special names:
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005029 NONE no color (transparent)
5030 bg use normal background color
5031 background use normal background color
5032 fg use normal foreground color
5033 foreground use normal foreground color
5034 To use a color name with an embedded space or other special character,
5035 put it in single quotes. The single quote cannot be used then.
5036 Example: >
5037 :hi comment guifg='salmon pink'
5038<
5039 *gui-colors*
5040 Suggested color names (these are available on most systems):
5041 Red LightRed DarkRed
5042 Green LightGreen DarkGreen SeaGreen
5043 Blue LightBlue DarkBlue SlateBlue
5044 Cyan LightCyan DarkCyan
5045 Magenta LightMagenta DarkMagenta
5046 Yellow LightYellow Brown DarkYellow
5047 Gray LightGray DarkGray
5048 Black White
5049 Orange Purple Violet
5050
5051 In the Win32 GUI version, additional system colors are available. See
5052 |win32-colors|.
5053
5054 You can also specify a color by its Red, Green and Blue values.
5055 The format is "#rrggbb", where
5056 "rr" is the Red value
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005057 "gg" is the Green value
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +00005058 "bb" is the Blue value
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005059 All values are hexadecimal, range from "00" to "ff". Examples: >
5060 :highlight Comment guifg=#11f0c3 guibg=#ff00ff
5061<
5062 *highlight-groups* *highlight-default*
5063These are the default highlighting groups. These groups are used by the
5064'highlight' option default. Note that the highlighting depends on the value
5065of 'background'. You can see the current settings with the ":highlight"
5066command.
Bram Moolenaar1a384422010-07-14 19:53:30 +02005067 *hl-ColorColumn*
5068ColorColumn used for the columns set with 'colorcolumn'
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02005069 *hl-Conceal*
5070Conceal placeholder characters substituted for concealed
5071 text (see 'conceallevel')
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005072 *hl-Cursor*
5073Cursor the character under the cursor
Bram Moolenaarf90b6e02019-05-09 19:26:38 +02005074lCursor the character under the cursor when |language-mapping|
5075 is used (see 'guicursor')
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005076 *hl-CursorIM*
5077CursorIM like Cursor, but used when in IME mode |CursorIM|
Bram Moolenaar5316eee2006-03-12 22:11:10 +00005078 *hl-CursorColumn*
5079CursorColumn the screen column that the cursor is in when 'cursorcolumn' is
5080 set
5081 *hl-CursorLine*
5082CursorLine the screen line that the cursor is in when 'cursorline' is
5083 set
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005084 *hl-Directory*
5085Directory directory names (and other special names in listings)
5086 *hl-DiffAdd*
5087DiffAdd diff mode: Added line |diff.txt|
5088 *hl-DiffChange*
5089DiffChange diff mode: Changed line |diff.txt|
5090 *hl-DiffDelete*
5091DiffDelete diff mode: Deleted line |diff.txt|
5092 *hl-DiffText*
5093DiffText diff mode: Changed text within a changed line |diff.txt|
Bram Moolenaardc1f1642016-08-16 18:33:43 +02005094 *hl-EndOfBuffer*
Bram Moolenaar58b85342016-08-14 19:54:54 +02005095EndOfBuffer filler lines (~) after the last line in the buffer.
5096 By default, this is highlighted like |hl-NonText|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005097 *hl-ErrorMsg*
5098ErrorMsg error messages on the command line
5099 *hl-VertSplit*
5100VertSplit the column separating vertically split windows
5101 *hl-Folded*
5102Folded line used for closed folds
5103 *hl-FoldColumn*
5104FoldColumn 'foldcolumn'
5105 *hl-SignColumn*
5106SignColumn column where |signs| are displayed
5107 *hl-IncSearch*
5108IncSearch 'incsearch' highlighting; also used for the text replaced with
5109 ":s///c"
5110 *hl-LineNr*
Bram Moolenaarfd2ac762006-03-01 22:09:21 +00005111LineNr Line number for ":number" and ":#" commands, and when 'number'
Bram Moolenaar64486672010-05-16 15:46:46 +02005112 or 'relativenumber' option is set.
Bram Moolenaarefae76a2019-10-27 22:54:58 +01005113 *hl-LineNrAbove*
5114LineNrAbove Line number for when the 'relativenumber'
5115 option is set, above the cursor line.
5116 *hl-LineNrBelow*
5117LineNrBelow Line number for when the 'relativenumber'
5118 option is set, below the cursor line.
Bram Moolenaar61d35bd2012-03-28 20:51:51 +02005119 *hl-CursorLineNr*
Bram Moolenaar410e98a2019-09-09 22:05:49 +02005120CursorLineNr Like LineNr when 'cursorline' is set and 'cursorlineopt' is
5121 set to "number" or "both", or 'relativenumber' is set, for
Bram Moolenaara3e6bc92013-01-30 14:18:00 +01005122 the cursor line.
Bram Moolenaarfd2ac762006-03-01 22:09:21 +00005123 *hl-MatchParen*
5124MatchParen The character under the cursor or just before it, if it
5125 is a paired bracket, and its match. |pi_paren.txt|
5126
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005127 *hl-ModeMsg*
5128ModeMsg 'showmode' message (e.g., "-- INSERT --")
5129 *hl-MoreMsg*
5130MoreMsg |more-prompt|
5131 *hl-NonText*
Bram Moolenaar58b85342016-08-14 19:54:54 +02005132NonText '@' at the end of the window, characters from 'showbreak'
5133 and other characters that do not really exist in the text
5134 (e.g., ">" displayed when a double-wide character doesn't
5135 fit at the end of the line).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005136 *hl-Normal*
5137Normal normal text
Bram Moolenaar1c7715d2005-10-03 22:02:18 +00005138 *hl-Pmenu*
5139Pmenu Popup menu: normal item.
5140 *hl-PmenuSel*
5141PmenuSel Popup menu: selected item.
5142 *hl-PmenuSbar*
5143PmenuSbar Popup menu: scrollbar.
5144 *hl-PmenuThumb*
5145PmenuThumb Popup menu: Thumb of the scrollbar.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005146 *hl-Question*
5147Question |hit-enter| prompt and yes/no questions
Bram Moolenaar74675a62017-07-15 13:53:23 +02005148 *hl-QuickFixLine*
5149QuickFixLine Current |quickfix| item in the quickfix window.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005150 *hl-Search*
5151Search Last search pattern highlighting (see 'hlsearch').
Bram Moolenaar74675a62017-07-15 13:53:23 +02005152 Also used for similar items that need to stand out.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005153 *hl-SpecialKey*
5154SpecialKey Meta and special keys listed with ":map", also for text used
5155 to show unprintable characters in the text, 'listchars'.
5156 Generally: text that is displayed differently from what it
5157 really is.
Bram Moolenaar217ad922005-03-20 22:37:15 +00005158 *hl-SpellBad*
5159SpellBad Word that is not recognized by the spellchecker. |spell|
5160 This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise.
Bram Moolenaar53180ce2005-07-05 21:48:14 +00005161 *hl-SpellCap*
5162SpellCap Word that should start with a capital. |spell|
5163 This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise.
Bram Moolenaar217ad922005-03-20 22:37:15 +00005164 *hl-SpellLocal*
5165SpellLocal Word that is recognized by the spellchecker as one that is
5166 used in another region. |spell|
5167 This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise.
5168 *hl-SpellRare*
5169SpellRare Word that is recognized by the spellchecker as one that is
5170 hardly ever used. |spell|
5171 This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005172 *hl-StatusLine*
5173StatusLine status line of current window
5174 *hl-StatusLineNC*
5175StatusLineNC status lines of not-current windows
5176 Note: if this is equal to "StatusLine" Vim will use "^^^" in
5177 the status line of the current window.
Bram Moolenaar40962ec2018-01-28 22:47:25 +01005178 *hl-StatusLineTerm*
5179StatusLineTerm status line of current window, if it is a |terminal| window.
5180 *hl-StatusLineTermNC*
5181StatusLineTermNC status lines of not-current windows that is a |terminal|
5182 window.
Bram Moolenaarfaa959a2006-02-20 21:37:40 +00005183 *hl-TabLine*
5184TabLine tab pages line, not active tab page label
5185 *hl-TabLineFill*
5186TabLineFill tab pages line, where there are no labels
5187 *hl-TabLineSel*
5188TabLineSel tab pages line, active tab page label
Bram Moolenaardf980db2017-12-24 13:22:00 +01005189 *hl-Terminal*
5190Terminal |terminal| window (see |terminal-size-color|)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005191 *hl-Title*
5192Title titles for output from ":set all", ":autocmd" etc.
5193 *hl-Visual*
5194Visual Visual mode selection
5195 *hl-VisualNOS*
5196VisualNOS Visual mode selection when vim is "Not Owning the Selection".
5197 Only X11 Gui's |gui-x11| and |xterm-clipboard| supports this.
5198 *hl-WarningMsg*
5199WarningMsg warning messages
5200 *hl-WildMenu*
5201WildMenu current match in 'wildmenu' completion
5202
Bram Moolenaarf75a9632005-09-13 21:20:47 +00005203 *hl-User1* *hl-User1..9* *hl-User9*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005204The 'statusline' syntax allows the use of 9 different highlights in the
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00005205statusline and ruler (via 'rulerformat'). The names are User1 to User9.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005206
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00005207For the GUI you can use the following groups to set the colors for the menu,
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005208scrollbars and tooltips. They don't have defaults. This doesn't work for the
5209Win32 GUI. Only three highlight arguments have any effect here: font, guibg,
5210and guifg.
5211
5212 *hl-Menu*
5213Menu Current font, background and foreground colors of the menus.
5214 Also used for the toolbar.
5215 Applicable highlight arguments: font, guibg, guifg.
5216
5217 NOTE: For Motif and Athena the font argument actually
5218 specifies a fontset at all times, no matter if 'guifontset' is
5219 empty, and as such it is tied to the current |:language| when
5220 set.
5221
5222 *hl-Scrollbar*
5223Scrollbar Current background and foreground of the main window's
5224 scrollbars.
5225 Applicable highlight arguments: guibg, guifg.
5226
5227 *hl-Tooltip*
5228Tooltip Current font, background and foreground of the tooltips.
5229 Applicable highlight arguments: font, guibg, guifg.
5230
5231 NOTE: For Motif and Athena the font argument actually
5232 specifies a fontset at all times, no matter if 'guifontset' is
5233 empty, and as such it is tied to the current |:language| when
5234 set.
5235
5236==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100523714. Linking groups *:hi-link* *:highlight-link* *E412* *E413*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005238
5239When you want to use the same highlighting for several syntax groups, you
5240can do this more easily by linking the groups into one common highlight
5241group, and give the color attributes only for that group.
5242
5243To set a link:
5244
5245 :hi[ghlight][!] [default] link {from-group} {to-group}
5246
5247To remove a link:
5248
5249 :hi[ghlight][!] [default] link {from-group} NONE
5250
5251Notes: *E414*
5252- If the {from-group} and/or {to-group} doesn't exist, it is created. You
5253 don't get an error message for a non-existing group.
5254- As soon as you use a ":highlight" command for a linked group, the link is
5255 removed.
5256- If there are already highlight settings for the {from-group}, the link is
5257 not made, unless the '!' is given. For a ":highlight link" command in a
5258 sourced file, you don't get an error message. This can be used to skip
5259 links for groups that already have settings.
5260
5261 *:hi-default* *:highlight-default*
5262The [default] argument is used for setting the default highlighting for a
5263group. If highlighting has already been specified for the group the command
5264will be ignored. Also when there is an existing link.
5265
5266Using [default] is especially useful to overrule the highlighting of a
5267specific syntax file. For example, the C syntax file contains: >
5268 :highlight default link cComment Comment
5269If you like Question highlighting for C comments, put this in your vimrc file: >
5270 :highlight link cComment Question
5271Without the "default" in the C syntax file, the highlighting would be
5272overruled when the syntax file is loaded.
5273
5274==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100527515. Cleaning up *:syn-clear* *E391*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005276
5277If you want to clear the syntax stuff for the current buffer, you can use this
5278command: >
5279 :syntax clear
5280
5281This command should be used when you want to switch off syntax highlighting,
5282or when you want to switch to using another syntax. It's normally not needed
5283in a syntax file itself, because syntax is cleared by the autocommands that
5284load the syntax file.
5285The command also deletes the "b:current_syntax" variable, since no syntax is
5286loaded after this command.
5287
Bram Moolenaar61da1bf2019-06-06 12:14:49 +02005288To clean up specific syntax groups for the current buffer: >
5289 :syntax clear {group-name} ..
5290This removes all patterns and keywords for {group-name}.
5291
5292To clean up specific syntax group lists for the current buffer: >
5293 :syntax clear @{grouplist-name} ..
5294This sets {grouplist-name}'s contents to an empty list.
5295
5296 *:syntax-off* *:syn-off*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005297If you want to disable syntax highlighting for all buffers, you need to remove
5298the autocommands that load the syntax files: >
5299 :syntax off
5300
5301What this command actually does, is executing the command >
5302 :source $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/nosyntax.vim
5303See the "nosyntax.vim" file for details. Note that for this to work
5304$VIMRUNTIME must be valid. See |$VIMRUNTIME|.
5305
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005306 *:syntax-reset* *:syn-reset*
5307If you have changed the colors and messed them up, use this command to get the
5308defaults back: >
5309
5310 :syntax reset
5311
Bram Moolenaar03413f42016-04-12 21:07:15 +02005312It is a bit of a wrong name, since it does not reset any syntax items, it only
5313affects the highlighting.
5314
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005315This doesn't change the colors for the 'highlight' option.
5316
5317Note that the syntax colors that you set in your vimrc file will also be reset
5318back to their Vim default.
5319Note that if you are using a color scheme, the colors defined by the color
5320scheme for syntax highlighting will be lost.
5321
5322What this actually does is: >
5323
5324 let g:syntax_cmd = "reset"
5325 runtime! syntax/syncolor.vim
5326
5327Note that this uses the 'runtimepath' option.
5328
5329 *syncolor*
5330If you want to use different colors for syntax highlighting, you can add a Vim
5331script file to set these colors. Put this file in a directory in
5332'runtimepath' which comes after $VIMRUNTIME, so that your settings overrule
5333the default colors. This way these colors will be used after the ":syntax
5334reset" command.
5335
5336For Unix you can use the file ~/.vim/after/syntax/syncolor.vim. Example: >
5337
5338 if &background == "light"
5339 highlight comment ctermfg=darkgreen guifg=darkgreen
5340 else
5341 highlight comment ctermfg=green guifg=green
5342 endif
5343
Bram Moolenaarc0197e22004-09-13 20:26:32 +00005344 *E679*
5345Do make sure this syncolor.vim script does not use a "syntax on", set the
5346'background' option or uses a "colorscheme" command, because it results in an
5347endless loop.
5348
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005349Note that when a color scheme is used, there might be some confusion whether
5350your defined colors are to be used or the colors from the scheme. This
5351depends on the color scheme file. See |:colorscheme|.
5352
5353 *syntax_cmd*
5354The "syntax_cmd" variable is set to one of these values when the
5355syntax/syncolor.vim files are loaded:
5356 "on" ":syntax on" command. Highlight colors are overruled but
5357 links are kept
5358 "enable" ":syntax enable" command. Only define colors for groups that
5359 don't have highlighting yet. Use ":syntax default".
5360 "reset" ":syntax reset" command or loading a color scheme. Define all
5361 the colors.
5362 "skip" Don't define colors. Used to skip the default settings when a
5363 syncolor.vim file earlier in 'runtimepath' has already set
5364 them.
5365
5366==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100536716. Highlighting tags *tag-highlight*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005368
5369If you want to highlight all the tags in your file, you can use the following
5370mappings.
5371
5372 <F11> -- Generate tags.vim file, and highlight tags.
5373 <F12> -- Just highlight tags based on existing tags.vim file.
5374>
5375 :map <F11> :sp tags<CR>:%s/^\([^ :]*:\)\=\([^ ]*\).*/syntax keyword Tag \2/<CR>:wq! tags.vim<CR>/^<CR><F12>
5376 :map <F12> :so tags.vim<CR>
5377
5378WARNING: The longer the tags file, the slower this will be, and the more
5379memory Vim will consume.
5380
5381Only highlighting typedefs, unions and structs can be done too. For this you
5382must use Exuberant ctags (found at http://ctags.sf.net).
5383
5384Put these lines in your Makefile:
5385
5386# Make a highlight file for types. Requires Exuberant ctags and awk
5387types: types.vim
5388types.vim: *.[ch]
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00005389 ctags --c-kinds=gstu -o- *.[ch] |\
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005390 awk 'BEGIN{printf("syntax keyword Type\t")}\
5391 {printf("%s ", $$1)}END{print ""}' > $@
5392
5393And put these lines in your .vimrc: >
5394
5395 " load the types.vim highlighting file, if it exists
5396 autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] let fname = expand('<afile>:p:h') . '/types.vim'
5397 autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] if filereadable(fname)
5398 autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] exe 'so ' . fname
5399 autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] endif
5400
5401==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100540217. Window-local syntax *:ownsyntax*
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02005403
5404Normally all windows on a buffer share the same syntax settings. It is
5405possible, however, to set a particular window on a file to have its own
5406private syntax setting. A possible example would be to edit LaTeX source
5407with conventional highlighting in one window, while seeing the same source
5408highlighted differently (so as to hide control sequences and indicate bold,
5409italic etc regions) in another. The 'scrollbind' option is useful here.
5410
5411To set the current window to have the syntax "foo", separately from all other
5412windows on the buffer: >
5413 :ownsyntax foo
Bram Moolenaardebe25a2010-06-06 17:41:24 +02005414< *w:current_syntax*
5415This will set the "w:current_syntax" variable to "foo". The value of
5416"b:current_syntax" does not change. This is implemented by saving and
5417restoring "b:current_syntax", since the syntax files do set
5418"b:current_syntax". The value set by the syntax file is assigned to
5419"w:current_syntax".
Bram Moolenaared32d942014-12-06 23:33:00 +01005420Note: This resets the 'spell', 'spellcapcheck' and 'spellfile' options.
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02005421
5422Once a window has its own syntax, syntax commands executed from other windows
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02005423on the same buffer (including :syntax clear) have no effect. Conversely,
Bram Moolenaarbf884932013-04-05 22:26:15 +02005424syntax commands executed from that window do not affect other windows on the
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02005425same buffer.
5426
Bram Moolenaardebe25a2010-06-06 17:41:24 +02005427A window with its own syntax reverts to normal behavior when another buffer
5428is loaded into that window or the file is reloaded.
5429When splitting the window, the new window will use the original syntax.
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02005430
5431==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100543218. Color xterms *xterm-color* *color-xterm*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005433
5434Most color xterms have only eight colors. If you don't get colors with the
5435default setup, it should work with these lines in your .vimrc: >
5436 :if &term =~ "xterm"
5437 : if has("terminfo")
5438 : set t_Co=8
5439 : set t_Sf=<Esc>[3%p1%dm
5440 : set t_Sb=<Esc>[4%p1%dm
5441 : else
5442 : set t_Co=8
5443 : set t_Sf=<Esc>[3%dm
5444 : set t_Sb=<Esc>[4%dm
5445 : endif
5446 :endif
5447< [<Esc> is a real escape, type CTRL-V <Esc>]
5448
5449You might want to change the first "if" to match the name of your terminal,
5450e.g. "dtterm" instead of "xterm".
5451
5452Note: Do these settings BEFORE doing ":syntax on". Otherwise the colors may
5453be wrong.
5454 *xiterm* *rxvt*
5455The above settings have been mentioned to work for xiterm and rxvt too.
5456But for using 16 colors in an rxvt these should work with terminfo: >
5457 :set t_AB=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t25;%p1%{40}%+%e5;%p1%{32}%+%;%dm
5458 :set t_AF=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t22;%p1%{30}%+%e1;%p1%{22}%+%;%dm
5459<
5460 *colortest.vim*
5461To test your color setup, a file has been included in the Vim distribution.
Bram Moolenaarf740b292006-02-16 22:11:02 +00005462To use it, execute this command: >
5463 :runtime syntax/colortest.vim
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005464
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00005465Some versions of xterm (and other terminals, like the Linux console) can
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005466output lighter foreground colors, even though the number of colors is defined
5467at 8. Therefore Vim sets the "cterm=bold" attribute for light foreground
5468colors, when 't_Co' is 8.
5469
5470 *xfree-xterm*
5471To get 16 colors or more, get the newest xterm version (which should be
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00005472included with XFree86 3.3 and later). You can also find the latest version
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005473at: >
5474 http://invisible-island.net/xterm/xterm.html
5475Here is a good way to configure it. This uses 88 colors and enables the
5476termcap-query feature, which allows Vim to ask the xterm how many colors it
5477supports. >
5478 ./configure --disable-bold-color --enable-88-color --enable-tcap-query
5479If you only get 8 colors, check the xterm compilation settings.
5480(Also see |UTF8-xterm| for using this xterm with UTF-8 character encoding).
5481
5482This xterm should work with these lines in your .vimrc (for 16 colors): >
5483 :if has("terminfo")
5484 : set t_Co=16
5485 : set t_AB=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{40}%+%e%p1%{92}%+%;%dm
5486 : set t_AF=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{30}%+%e%p1%{82}%+%;%dm
5487 :else
5488 : set t_Co=16
5489 : set t_Sf=<Esc>[3%dm
5490 : set t_Sb=<Esc>[4%dm
5491 :endif
5492< [<Esc> is a real escape, type CTRL-V <Esc>]
5493
5494Without |+terminfo|, Vim will recognize these settings, and automatically
5495translate cterm colors of 8 and above to "<Esc>[9%dm" and "<Esc>[10%dm".
5496Colors above 16 are also translated automatically.
5497
5498For 256 colors this has been reported to work: >
5499
5500 :set t_AB=<Esc>[48;5;%dm
5501 :set t_AF=<Esc>[38;5;%dm
5502
5503Or just set the TERM environment variable to "xterm-color" or "xterm-16color"
5504and try if that works.
5505
5506You probably want to use these X resources (in your ~/.Xdefaults file):
5507 XTerm*color0: #000000
5508 XTerm*color1: #c00000
5509 XTerm*color2: #008000
5510 XTerm*color3: #808000
5511 XTerm*color4: #0000c0
5512 XTerm*color5: #c000c0
5513 XTerm*color6: #008080
5514 XTerm*color7: #c0c0c0
5515 XTerm*color8: #808080
5516 XTerm*color9: #ff6060
5517 XTerm*color10: #00ff00
5518 XTerm*color11: #ffff00
5519 XTerm*color12: #8080ff
5520 XTerm*color13: #ff40ff
5521 XTerm*color14: #00ffff
5522 XTerm*color15: #ffffff
5523 Xterm*cursorColor: Black
5524
5525[Note: The cursorColor is required to work around a bug, which changes the
5526cursor color to the color of the last drawn text. This has been fixed by a
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00005527newer version of xterm, but not everybody is using it yet.]
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005528
5529To get these right away, reload the .Xdefaults file to the X Option database
5530Manager (you only need to do this when you just changed the .Xdefaults file): >
5531 xrdb -merge ~/.Xdefaults
5532<
5533 *xterm-blink* *xterm-blinking-cursor*
5534To make the cursor blink in an xterm, see tools/blink.c. Or use Thomas
5535Dickey's xterm above patchlevel 107 (see above for where to get it), with
5536these resources:
5537 XTerm*cursorBlink: on
5538 XTerm*cursorOnTime: 400
5539 XTerm*cursorOffTime: 250
5540 XTerm*cursorColor: White
5541
5542 *hpterm-color*
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00005543These settings work (more or less) for an hpterm, which only supports 8
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005544foreground colors: >
5545 :if has("terminfo")
5546 : set t_Co=8
5547 : set t_Sf=<Esc>[&v%p1%dS
5548 : set t_Sb=<Esc>[&v7S
5549 :else
5550 : set t_Co=8
5551 : set t_Sf=<Esc>[&v%dS
5552 : set t_Sb=<Esc>[&v7S
5553 :endif
5554< [<Esc> is a real escape, type CTRL-V <Esc>]
5555
5556 *Eterm* *enlightened-terminal*
5557These settings have been reported to work for the Enlightened terminal
5558emulator, or Eterm. They might work for all xterm-like terminals that use the
5559bold attribute to get bright colors. Add an ":if" like above when needed. >
5560 :set t_Co=16
5561 :set t_AF=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t3%p1%d%e%p1%{22}%+%d;1%;m
5562 :set t_AB=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t4%p1%d%e%p1%{32}%+%d;1%;m
5563<
5564 *TTpro-telnet*
5565These settings should work for TTpro telnet. Tera Term Pro is a freeware /
5566open-source program for MS-Windows. >
5567 set t_Co=16
5568 set t_AB=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{40}%+%e%p1%{32}%+5;%;%dm
5569 set t_AF=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{30}%+%e%p1%{22}%+1;%;%dm
5570Also make sure TTpro's Setup / Window / Full Color is enabled, and make sure
5571that Setup / Font / Enable Bold is NOT enabled.
5572(info provided by John Love-Jensen <eljay@Adobe.COM>)
5573
Bram Moolenaar8a7f5a22013-06-06 14:01:46 +02005574
5575==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100557619. When syntax is slow *:syntime*
Bram Moolenaar8a7f5a22013-06-06 14:01:46 +02005577
5578This is aimed at authors of a syntax file.
5579
5580If your syntax causes redrawing to be slow, here are a few hints on making it
5581faster. To see slowness switch on some features that usually interfere, such
5582as 'relativenumber' and |folding|.
5583
Bram Moolenaar203d04d2013-06-06 21:36:40 +02005584Note: this is only available when compiled with the |+profile| feature.
5585You many need to build Vim with "huge" features.
5586
Bram Moolenaar8a7f5a22013-06-06 14:01:46 +02005587To find out what patterns are consuming most time, get an overview with this
5588sequence: >
5589 :syntime on
5590 [ redraw the text at least once with CTRL-L ]
5591 :syntime report
5592
5593This will display a list of syntax patterns that were used, sorted by the time
5594it took to match them against the text.
5595
5596:syntime on Start measuring syntax times. This will add some
5597 overhead to compute the time spent on syntax pattern
5598 matching.
5599
5600:syntime off Stop measuring syntax times.
5601
5602:syntime clear Set all the counters to zero, restart measuring.
5603
5604:syntime report Show the syntax items used since ":syntime on" in the
5605 current window. Use a wider display to see more of
5606 the output.
5607
5608 The list is sorted by total time. The columns are:
5609 TOTAL Total time in seconds spent on
5610 matching this pattern.
5611 COUNT Number of times the pattern was used.
5612 MATCH Number of times the pattern actually
5613 matched
5614 SLOWEST The longest time for one try.
5615 AVERAGE The average time for one try.
5616 NAME Name of the syntax item. Note that
5617 this is not unique.
5618 PATTERN The pattern being used.
5619
5620Pattern matching gets slow when it has to try many alternatives. Try to
5621include as much literal text as possible to reduce the number of ways a
5622pattern does NOT match.
5623
5624When using the "\@<=" and "\@<!" items, add a maximum size to avoid trying at
5625all positions in the current and previous line. For example, if the item is
5626literal text specify the size of that text (in bytes):
5627
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02005628"<\@<=span" Matches "span" in "<span". This tries matching with "<" in
Bram Moolenaar8a7f5a22013-06-06 14:01:46 +02005629 many places.
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02005630"<\@1<=span" Matches the same, but only tries one byte before "span".
Bram Moolenaar8a7f5a22013-06-06 14:01:46 +02005631
5632
Bram Moolenaar91f84f62018-07-29 15:07:52 +02005633 vim:tw=78:sw=4:ts=8:noet:ft=help:norl: